JP6540635B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a hitting gaming state or the like is triggered by the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion provided in the gaming area. To be done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery being performed, and the stop result according to the lottery result is obtained when the final stop display of the variable display is performed. The display effect of one game cycle to be displayed is executed. In addition, when the lottery result is winning transition to the so-called winning gaming state, for example after the display effect for one game cycle is performed, opening and closing of the variable winning device provided in the game area is executed, variable The game balls are paid out according to the number of ball entry into the winning device.

  In addition, there is a pachinko gaming machine in which information used for lottery is held and stored when the game ball enters the starting ball entry portion while the variation display of the pattern is being performed. When the on-hold storage is performed, after the variation display of the pattern is finished, the winning lottery is performed using the on-hold stored information, and the next on-off display of the variation is started (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-003004, A

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is an acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information based on the occurrence of an acquisition opportunity;
Predetermined information storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A determination is made as to whether the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the assignment correspondence information corresponding to the provision of profit, and a plurality of the predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means In the case where the predetermined determination information is determined, the determination unit sequentially performs the determination on the plurality of pieces of predetermined information;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege based on the result of the assignment determination becoming the assignment correspondence result in which the predetermined information to be determined corresponds to the assignment correspondence information;
Specifying means for specifying whether or not the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information before the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means becomes a target of the addition determination;
Special execution means for executing special processing for causing an event advantageous to the player based on the fact that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information by the specific means;
An exclusion unit that excludes the specific predetermined information from the target of the assignment determination;
Equipped with
The special execution means is provided with a lottery means for specifying whether or not to execute the special process by a lottery when the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information,
As the number of the specific predetermined information corresponding to the special information increases, the probability that the special process is performed in the lottery is likely to be high or high .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. (A) It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating a variable winning a prize apparatus. It is a rear view for explaining various winning a prize detection sensors. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining an acceptance table for low probability mode, (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining an acceptance table for high probability mode, (c) Distribution for upper operation opening It is an explanatory view for explaining a table, and is an explanatory view for explaining a distribution table for (d) lower operation opening. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process for the operating ports performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the classification determination processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit winning number specific process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit information identification process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd jackpot information identification process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special round number setting process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding information corresponding | compatible process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer processing at the time of completion | finish of the switching | closing execution mode performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer processing performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit winning number specific process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st addition lottery table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd addition lottery table. It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an execution area. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the simultaneous digestion process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the simultaneous change start process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the simultaneous digestion determination post-process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st jackpot information identification process performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd jackpot information identification process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer processing performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening / closing process performed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting specific process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows a within-pending propriety determination process that is executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd reservation right or wrong decision processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the yes-no decision processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st pending | passing pass / fail determination process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display control processing performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image alerting | reporting that the extension of the round game was decided, (b) Hold information corresponding to big hit is included in the obtained hold information It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image which alert | reports. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining an image displayed in the 1st special ending effect, and (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining an image displayed in the 2nd special ending effect. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image displayed in the extension standby period of a round game, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image displayed when the opening / closing execution mode for an extension is started It is. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display time related process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a time chart for explaining the flow of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd reservation success / failure determination process performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st pending | passing pass / fail determination process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display time related process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a time chart for explaining the flow of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer processing performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd reservation right or wrong decision processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ending period setting process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the opening period setting process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine") which is a type of gaming machine will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) disposed behind the inner frame.

  An inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. In addition, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated backward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

  The gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip and has a function to lock the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. And has a function to lock the front door frame 14 against the inner frame in an unopenable manner. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  The game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. Here, the configuration of the game board 20 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20. As shown in FIG.

  The gaming board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operation opening (first start entry ball) 23, a lower operation opening (second start entry ball) 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, An upper operation opening display unit 33, a lower operation opening display unit 34, and a symbol display unit 35 and the like are provided.

  When the ball is entered into the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating opening 23, and the lower operating opening 24, various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 23a, 22d disposed on the back side of the game board 20 A predetermined number of award balls are paid out based on the detection result detected by the sensor 24c. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 20, and game balls which have not entered the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. Further, on the game board 20, a large number of nails 28 are implanted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and it is discharged not only from the gaming area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the gaming area after passing through the opening Not included. However, in the following description, the variable winning device 22, the upper operation opening 23, the lower operation opening 24 or the entry of the game ball to the through gate 25 is clearly entered in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of the game ball to the out port 27. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating opening 23 and the lower operating opening 24 are unitized as an operating opening device and installed on the game board 20. The upper operating opening 23 and the lower operating opening 24 are both open upward. Further, both operation ports 23 and 24 are aligned in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 23 is on the upper side. The lower operating port 24 is provided with a motorized part 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The motorized jack 24a is connected to a motorized jack drive 24b mounted on the back side of the game board 20, and is driven by the motored jack drive 24b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) It is placed in either the open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory 24a, the gaming ball can not win a prize in the lower operating port 24, and the electric active article 24a is in an open state, and a winning in the lower operating port 24 is possible.

  In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible that the game ball in the lower operation opening 24 is likely to generate a prize, and the state in which a prize is not more likely to occur than the above is more likely. The accessory 24a may be switched. In addition, the motorized part 24a may be defective, and switching between a state in which a winning is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the lower operation port 24 itself.

  As shown in FIG. 2 (b), the variable winning device 22 is provided with a large winning opening 22a leading to the back side of the game board 20, and is provided with an open / close door 22b for opening and closing the high winning opening 22a. . The open / close door 22b is connected to a variable winning drive 22c integrally provided as the variable winning device 22 (not shown), and is driven by the variable winning drive 22c to close and open the variable winning drive 22c. Will be placed in any of. Specifically, the game ball is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball is likely to win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery. The open / close execution mode will be described in detail later.

  Here, various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 24c, 25a will be described based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view for explaining the various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 24c, 25a.

  On the back of the game board 20, as shown in FIG. 3, a collecting board unit 29 is provided below the variable display unit 26. The collecting plate unit 29 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls that have won in various winning openings, and a winning detection mechanism for detecting winning of gaming balls in various winning openings and the like. .

  The game ball collecting mechanism will be described. The collecting plate unit 29 corresponds to the game board opening of the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operation opening 23 and the lower operation opening 24 and is located at one downstream location. A collection passage 29a is formed. Therefore, all the game balls that have won in the general winning opening 21 and the like gather under the game board 20 through the recovery passage 29a. There is a discharge passage below the game board 20, and the gaming balls gathered below the game board 20 by the collection passage 29a are led out into the discharge passage. The out port 27 also leads to the discharge path, and the game balls that did not win in any of the winning ports 21, 22, 23, 24 are also led out into the discharge path through the out port 27.

  A description will be given of the winning detection mechanism. The collecting plate unit 29 is provided with a winning opening sensor 21a at a position corresponding to each general winning opening 21 on the front side of the gaming board 20. Further, a count sensor 22d is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 22, an upper operation port sensor 23a is provided at a position corresponding to the upper operation port 23, and a lower operation port sensor 24c is provided at a position corresponding to the lower operation port 24. Is provided. In addition, on the right side of the variable display unit 26 outside the collective plate unit 29, a gate sensor 25a for detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 25 is provided. The winning of the game ball is detected by the sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 24c, 25a as these ball detection sensors (game medium detection means). The sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 24c, 25a output electric signals to a main control unit 60 described later. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when the gaming ball is not detected, and a HI level signal is output when the gaming ball is detected. In addition, it is not limited to this, it is good also as composition which outputs a HI level signal in a state where a game ball is not detected, and outputs a LOW level signal in a state where a game ball is detected. The electric signal may be output only in a state in which the signal is detected.

  In the upper operation opening display section 33 shown in FIG. 2A, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper operation opening 23 as a trigger, and the winning of the upper operation opening 23 is performed as a result of stopping the variation display The result of the internal lottery made on the basis is clearly indicated by the display. Then, if the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operation port 23 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the upper operation port display section 33. After the fluctuation display is stopped, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode.

  In the lower operation opening display unit 34, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the lower operation opening 24 as a trigger, and the internal drawing performed based on the winning of the lower operation opening 24 as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of is clearly indicated by the display. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the lower operation port 24 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the lower operation port display section 34. After the fluctuation display is stopped, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, winning in the upper actuation opening 23 and winning in the lower actuation opening 24 are distinguished in the internal lottery, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper actuation opening 23 Is clearly indicated by the upper operation opening display section 33, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operation opening 24 is clearly indicated by the lower operation opening display section 34.

  In addition, although the display part 33 for upper operating ports and the display part 34 for lower operating ports are comprised with the segment display which a some segment light emission part is arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is limited to this Instead, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed by the upper operation port display unit 33 and the lower operation port display unit 34, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of symbols are variably displayed, plural A configuration in which a kind character is variably displayed or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the prize display unit 35, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning on the through gate 25, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning on the through gate 25 is Explicitly shown. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning on the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the electronic part opening state, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the role display display unit 35 and the fluctuation display After being stopped, shift to the open state. In the open state, the motorized accessory 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 for variably displaying (or variable display or switching display) a symbol which is a kind of symbol, and the center frame 32 is disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 31 It is done. The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 100 described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen G such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and a dot matrix It may be a display.

  In the symbol display device 31, variable display of symbols is started based on winning on the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. That is, when the variable display is performed on the upper operation port display unit 33 or the lower operation port display unit 34, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 in accordance with that.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a view individually showing the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 5 is a view showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), a pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine types of main designs, each of which has a numeral of "1" to "9", and a shell-shaped picture It is constituted by the sub pattern. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers of "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower are set as a plurality of display areas. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols and the sub symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol . In the lower figure pattern row Z3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1" The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged in each, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, ten main symbols are arranged and are configured by twenty symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine patterns of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be. Further, on the display screen G, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set.

  In the case where effects for game circulation are performed on the display screen G based on winning on the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24, the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, it is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 and finally the predetermined symbol is still displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 for gaming use The production of is finished.

  In addition, when the effect for the game circulation is ended, a combination of symbols in which the same number is attached to any valid line is formed if it is a game circulation corresponding to the jackpot result.

  In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described symbol. For example, only numbers may be variably displayed as a pattern.

  Further, in the lower part of the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, a first hold number display area Ga and a second hold number display area Gb are set. Specifically, the first hold number display area Ga is set on the left side of the lower portion of the display screen G, and the second hold number display area Gb is set on the right side of the lower portion of the display screen G.

  In the present embodiment, the winning of the upper operating opening 23 and the winning of the lower operating opening 24 are distinguished, and the first hold number display area Ga holds and stores the winning history of the upper operating opening 23. The number is displayed, and in the second hold number display area Gb, the number for which the winning history to the lower operation port 24 is held is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number capable of holding and storing the winning history in the upper operation opening 23 and the number capable of holding and storing the winning history in the lower operation opening 24 are respectively 255 It is set to

  Here, for example, in the case where the number for which the winning history to the upper operation opening 23 is stored pending is one, “1” is displayed in the first hold number display area Ga, and the winning history for the upper operation opening 23 is When the number of pending storages is 255, “255” is displayed in the first pending number display area Ga. Similarly, when the number of pending storages for the winning history in the lower operation opening 24 is one, “1” is displayed in the second hold number display area Gb, and the winning history for the lower opening 24 is pending. If the number stored is 255, “255” is displayed in the second hold count display area Gb.

  Further, when the winning history to the operation openings 23, 24 is not stored on hold, no number is displayed in the number-of-holdings display area Ga, Gb. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the winning history to the operation ports 23 and 24 is not stored on hold, “0” may be displayed in the number-of-holdings display area Ga and Gb. .

  The inner rail portion 41 and the outer rail portion 42 are attached to the game board 20, and the inner rail portion 41 and the outer rail portion 42 constitute a guide rail, and the inner frame is mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame The game balls fired from the played game ball launch mechanism (not shown) are guided to the top of the game area. The game ball emission mechanism performs a game ball emission operation by operating the emission handle 51 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 52 which allows almost the entire game area to be viewed from the front. The window 52 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 53 is fitted therein. The window panel 53 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. Incidentally, the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, the upper operating opening display portion 33, the lower operating opening display portion 34, and the like can be viewed through the window panel 53 from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  Around the window 52, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp unit 54 is provided above the window unit 52 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 54, speaker units 55 to which sound effects and the like according to the game situation are output are provided.

  Under the window 52 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 56 and a lower bulging portion 57 bulging toward the front side are vertically arranged in parallel. An upper plate 56a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 56, and a lower plate 57a opening similarly upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 57. The upper tray 56a has a function for temporarily storing the gaming balls paid out from the later-described payout device 71 and guiding the gaming balls to the gaming ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower tray 57a has a function of storing the game balls which have become surplus in the upper tray 56a. The game balls paid out from the payout device 71 mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper tray 56a and the lower tray 57a.

  On the back side of the inner frame, a main control device 60, an audio light emission control device 90, and a display control device 100 are mounted. Further, as described above, the back pack unit is provided on the back of the inner frame, and the back pack unit includes the payout mechanism including the payout device 71, the payout control device 70, the power supply and the discharge control. A device 80 is mounted. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 which monitors the power supply. The main control unit 60 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening to the substrate box accommodating the main control substrate 61 etc. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can not be separably joined, and the structure of a joint portion (crimping portion) which requires destruction of a predetermined portion in the case of separation, and the adhesive layer becomes an adhesion target A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of having been peeled off by sticking is pasted across the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between several case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. The fact that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The power failure monitoring board 65 and the payout control device 70 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. In this case, a power supply having a function of supplying operating power and the emission control device 80 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, and power is supplied to the MPU 62 through the power failure monitoring board 65.

  Further, on the input side of the MPU 62, various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 24c, 25a are connected. In the MPU 62, the winning determination (entrance determination) for each ball entry portion is performed. Further, in the MPU 62, various types of lottery are executed based on winnings on the upper operation port 23 and the lower operation port 24.

  The power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a winning ball command is output to the payout control device 70 based on the result of the winning determination on the winning correspondence ball entry unit.

  The voice light emission control device 90 outputs various commands such as a variation command and a type command. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the audio light emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the main control device 60 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  In addition, on the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive 22c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22, an electric combination drive 24b for opening and closing the electric combination 24a of the lower opening 24, and an upper opening The display unit 33, the lower operation opening display unit 34, and the symbol display unit 35 are connected. The main control substrate 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the variable prize drive unit 22c is executed in the MPU 62 so that the big winning opening 22a is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the motorized combination 24a is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the motorized combination drive 24b so that the motorized combination 24a is opened and closed. In each gaming session, the MPU 62 executes display control of the display portion 33 for upper operation opening or the display portion 34 for lower operation opening. Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not the motorized combination 24a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the combination display unit 35 is executed in the MPU 62.

  The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply and emission control device 80, and monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and emission control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 71 based on the winning ball command input from the main control device 60.

  The power supply and launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc. generate necessary operation power for each and supply the generated operation power. By the way, the power supply and discharge control device 80 is provided with a power supply unit for powering off such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, The RAM 64 of the control device 60 is supplied with storage power. Further, the power supply and launch control device 80 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81, and the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

  The voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control substrate 91 on which the MPU 92 is mounted. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A certain RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

  The MPU 92 drives and controls the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 based on the command received from the main control device 60. In addition, these commands are transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 as they are or after analysis. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control device 100 is a display control board 101 on which an MPU 102, which is an element formed by compounding program ROM 103 and work RAM 104, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107 are mounted. Is equipped.

  The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the sound emission control apparatus 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105).

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require an external power supply to hold stored information. The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold stored information. It is.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 105 is formed into an IC chip, it is also referred to as a "drawing chip", and its substance is to be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 31 to display it.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 31. The character ROM 106 holds bit map type image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining a color to be expressed in each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 31. The display content of the symbol display device 31 is changed based on rewriting of the content of the video RAM 107.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 62 of main controller 60>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 62 uses a variety of counter information during game play, a big hit occurrence lottery, the setting of the display of the display portion 33 for the upper operation port or the display portion 34 for the lower operation port, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 31, the display of prizes Setting of display of 35 etc. is performed, and specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery of jackpot occurrence and a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when the symbol display device 31 changes out, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, the display portions 33 and 34 and the symbol display And a fluctuation type counter CS that determines a fluctuation display time in the device 31. Furthermore, the electric combination release counter C4 used in the drawing of whether or not the electric combination 24a of the lower operation opening 24 is in the electric combination release state is used. The counters C1 to C4 and CINI and CS are provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and reaches a maximum value and returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short intervals. When a winning on the operation openings 23, 24 occurs, information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding ball storage area 64a provided in the RAM 64 as acquisition information storage means Be done.

  The holding ball storage area 64a includes a first holding area Ra, a second holding area Rb, and an execution area AE.

  The first holding area Ra includes the first holding area Ra1 to the 255th holding area Ra255, and the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 according to the winning history of the upper operation opening 23. The combination of each numerical value information is stored in any one of the holding areas Ra1 to Ra255 as holding information. In this case, when winning in the upper operation opening 23 occurs a plurality of times consecutively, each numerical value information is stored in chronological order in the order of the nth holding area → the n + 1th holding area.

  Further, the first holding area Ra is provided with a first holding number storage area NA, and information for specifying the number on which the winning history to the upper operation opening 23 is held is stored. The first pending number storage area NA is set to 1 byte.

  The second storage area Rb includes the first storage area Rb1 to the 255th storage area Rb255, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter according to the winning history in the lower operation port 24. A combination of each numerical value information of C3 is stored in any one of the holding areas Rb1 to Rb255 as holding information. In this case, when winning in the lower operation opening 24 occurs a plurality of times consecutively, each numerical value information is stored in chronological order in the order of the nth holding area → the n + 1th holding area.

  Further, the second holding area Rb includes a second holding number storage area NB, and information for specifying the number of holding a winning history to the lower operation port 24 is stored. The second reserved number storage area NB is set to 1 byte.

  According to the present embodiment, it is possible to store up to 255 pieces of suspension information in each of the first suspension area Ra and the second suspension area Rb. Here, if it is configured that the number that can be reserved and stored in the first storage area Ra and the second storage area Rb can be easily reached, the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 Although there is a prize winning, there is a possibility that the frequency of occurrence of a situation where it is not possible to store the holding information in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb may be high. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the number of holdable storages is set to 255 in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb, so the hold information can be stored up to the holdable number. There is a low possibility of acquisition. As a result, when a winning on the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24 occurs, a situation occurs in which holding information can not be stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb. It is possible to reduce the frequency.

  The execution area AE starts each of the numerical value information stored in the first holding area Ra1 of the first holding area Ra when variable display of the upper operation opening display section 33 or the lower operation opening display section 34 is started, or This is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first holding area Rb1 of the second holding area Rb, and at the start of one game cycle, based on each numerical information stored in the execution area AE, Judgment etc. are performed.

  The respective counters will be described in detail.

  First, the motorized product release counter C4 will be described. For example, the motor-operated combination release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 250, and to return to zero after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold combination area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the motorized jack 24a in the open state based on the value of the stored motorized jack release counter C4.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set such that the modes of support by the motorized jack 24a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared in the situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric role 24a of the lower operation opening 24 is opened per unit time. The low frequency support mode (or the low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (or the high frequency guide state) are set such that the frequency of occurrence is relatively high and low.

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of being in the open position in the electric combination release lottery in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5) In the high frequency support mode, the number of times the motorized symbol 24a is released when the electronic component is released is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state is elected and the open state of the motorized accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The time is set shorter than one open time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the securing time minimumly secured when the next electric combination opening lottery is performed after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed rather than the low frequency support mode (ie, One display continuation time in the symbol display unit 35 is set to be short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the winning of the lower operation port 24 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the upper operation port 23 is higher than that of the lower operation port 24 but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operation port 24 to the lower operation port 24. The probability of winning will increase. And, when the winning a prize to the lower operation opening 24 occurs, because the payout of the specified number of game balls is executed, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the balls much be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is to be in the open state per unit time than in the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described one. It is also possible to increase the probability of being in the electronic combination open state winning state in. In addition, a securing time (for example, based on the winning on the through gate 25) is secured on the occasion where the next electric combination opening lottery is performed after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed (for example, In the configuration where multiple types of variable display to be executed are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that the short securing time is easier to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured upon the execution of the next electric combination opening lottery after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed is shortened. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among the shortening of the average securing time and the increase of the winning probability. .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hitting random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the gaming ball is in the upper operating opening 23
Or, at the timing when the lower operation port 24 wins, it is stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a yes / no table (win / fail information group) in a yes / no table storage area 63a as a yes / no information group storage unit in the ROM 63. Here, the contents of the success or failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the success / failure table for low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 8A and the success / failure table for high probability mode in FIG. Probability pass / fail information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode (low probability state) and the high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the hit / fall lottery means.

  Under the gaming state where the low probability mode hit / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 8A, the value of the random number to be the jackpot result is two. Under the gaming state where the high probability mode pass / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 8B, the value of the random number to be the jackpot result is 20. Therefore, it is easier to obtain a jackpot result by referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode in the lottery, than referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode in the lottery.

  The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot result in the low probability mode situation is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot result in the high probability mode situation. The number and the value of the random numbers resulting in the above-mentioned big hit are arbitrary as long as the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode. In addition, as the configuration in which the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot result in the low probability mode is only partially included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot result in the high probability mode. It may be good or not included.

  Further, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the value of the random number that is the jackpot result, and the deviation result does not become a transition opportunity of the acceptance lottery mode or the support mode.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb at the timing when the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 wins.

  The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 63b as distribution information storage means in the ROM 63. As shown in FIG. 8, as the distribution table, a distribution table for the upper operating port in FIG. 8C and a distribution table for the lower operating port in FIG. 8D are set.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, in the distribution table for the upper working port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0” to “29”, “0” to “14” are 6R normal jackpot results It corresponds, and "15"-"29" respond | correspond to 6R probability variation jackpot result.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8 (d), in the distribution table for the lower opening, of the big hit type counters C2 of “0” to “29”, “0” to “14” are 16R normal big hit results. It corresponds, and "15"-"29" respond | correspond to 16R probability variation big hit result.

  According to the present embodiment, the type of jackpot result is different between when the jackpot is won with the winning of the upper operation opening 23 and when the jackpot is won with the winning of the lower operation opening 24. doing. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the operation openings 23 and 24 at which the game ball has won.

  When comparing the distribution table for the upper operation port and the distribution table for the lower operation port, the distribution table for the lower operation port is for round games, which will be described later, than the distribution table for the upper operation port. The number of rounds is set to be large. As a result, it is possible to expect a jackpot to be won with the winning of the lower operation port 24 as a trigger.

  The 6R normal jackpot result and the 16R normal jackpot result are jackpot results in which the success or failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. Further, the 6R probability variation big hit result and the 16R probability variation big result are jackpot results in which the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

  The open / close execution mode is a mode in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times. In the round game, a large winning opening is satisfied until either a predetermined upper limit continuation period elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls wins the large winning opening 22a. It is a game in which the state in which 22a is open | released continues. In each round game, opening of the special winning opening 22a is performed only once, but may be configured to be performed a plurality of times.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the release handle 51 is operated by the player, the game ball emission mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is emitted toward the game area in 0.6 sec. . Then, in each round game, the upper limit continuation time of a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game is set. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that winnings corresponding to the upper limit number in one round game will occur in the big winning opening 22a.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb at a timing when the gaming ball has won the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 31. An expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 31 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (pattern), and a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an application result in a game round that results in a big hit The display for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the result of the provision correspondence before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol (pattern) in the symbol display device 31 is started. I say the state. In addition, specifically, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol in which the same number was attached | subjected on one effective line is stopped-displayed.

  In the expectation effect, two types of reach display and advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the occurrence of the response to an assignment in a stage before the reach display and the like are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying symbols for a part of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, and the rest are displayed in that state. The display state which performs the fluctuation display of a symbol in a symbol row is included. Also, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, or Also, it is possible to perform reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or non-displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the advance notice display, after variation display of symbols is started on display screen G of symbol display device 31, in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some symbol rows In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, the background screen is a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and the pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is the predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice may occur at any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in game times corresponding to the disconnection result, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. Will be executed if

  On the other hand, the main control unit 60 does not determine whether to display the advance notice, but the sound emission control unit 90 does. In this case, in the voice light emission control device 90, the game times corresponding to the big hit result are more likely to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the out result, and the notice display having a low appearance rate is more likely to occur. In order to satisfy at least one of the conditions, a lottery process for displaying a notice is performed. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed by the symbol display device 31.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the fluctuation display time on the display units 33 and 34 and the fluctuation display time on the symbol display device 31. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated by timer interrupt processing described later, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS at the start of the fluctuation display on the display portions 33 and 34 and at the time of the fluctuation pattern determination at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 31 Is acquired.

<About various processes executed by main controller 60>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing which are executed to advance a game in the MPU 62 in the main control device 60 will be described. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes main processing activated with power on and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). The description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. This process is started up periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 62.

  In step S101, reading processing of the various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 24c is executed. Specifically, when winning in the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 occurs, the three-prize ball counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The three-prize ball counter is for counting the number of times that the three-prize ball command to instruct the payout control device 70 to pay out the three gaming balls should be output. It should be noted that since a winning on the upper operating port 23 and a winning on the lower operating port 24 can occur simultaneously within the range of one processing cycle of the timer interrupt process, the processing for adding one three-prize ball counter is one. It may be done twice.

  When a winning on the general winning opening 21 has occurred, the ten prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are incremented by one. The ten-prize ball counter is for counting the number of times the ten-prize ball command to instruct the payout control device 70 to pay out the ten gaming balls should be output.

  In addition, when winning in the special winning opening 22a has occurred, the 15 prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are incremented by one. The 15 prize ball counter is for counting the number of times the 15 prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 70 to pay out 15 gaming balls should be output.

  After the process of step S101 is performed, update of the random number initial value counter CINI is performed in step S102. In the subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric character release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the motorized combination release counter C4 are respectively incremented by one, and are cleared to zero when their counter values reach the maximum value.

  In the following step S104, a winning process for the operation opening is performed, and in step S105, a winning process for through is performed, and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the through winning process executed in step S105, when the winning on the through gate 25 occurs, the upper limit number (for example, "4") is stored in the number of bonus item storages stored in the electronic book holding area 64c. Under the condition that the value is less than), the value of the motorized jack release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric power holding area 64c.

  The winning processing for the operation opening executed in step S104 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the winning opening process for the operation opening performed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S201, it is determined whether or not a winning on the upper operation port 23 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether the signal received from the upper opening sensor 23a has switched from the LOW level signal to the HI level signal.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S201, the value stored in the first holding count storage area NA of the first holding area Ra is read out in step S202, and the first start pending storage is stored in the first holding area Ra. It is determined whether the number of holding balls NA is less than "255". The value “255” is an upper limit value capable of storing the hold information in the first hold area Ra, as described above. If the first starting ball holding number NA is equal to or more than the upper limit value, the winning process is ended as it is.

  If the first starting ball holding number NA is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S203, and the first starting ball holding number NA is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S204, each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S103 is the first of the free hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first holding area Ra. The storage areas Ra1 to Ra255, that is, the storage areas Ra1 to Ra255 corresponding to the number of storage areas reserved by one added at step S203 are stored.

  In the subsequent step S205, a first hold number increase command is set. The first hold number increase command is a command for specifying the timing at which the hold information corresponding to the winning on the upper operation opening 23 is acquired by the display control device 100. The first hold number increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12) described later. The voice emission control device 90 transmits the first hold number increase command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  Here, the processing in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 when the command transmitted from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 is received will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing command handling processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the first hold number increase command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S301: YES), the display control device 100 is stored on hold in the work RAM 104 in step S302. The first display holding memory number laN1 is incremented by one. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 can specify the number of pieces of suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra from the first display side suspension storage number laN1.

  In the subsequent step S303, information on the occurrence of a winning on the upper operation opening 23 is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the same number as the number of pieces of suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra after the occurrence of a winning on the upper operation port 23 is displayed in the first suspension number display area Ga.

  Returning to the explanation of the winning process for the operation opening (FIG. 10), if a negative determination is made in step S201, it is determined in step S206 whether or not a winning in the lower operation opening 24 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether the signal received from the lower opening sensor 24c has switched from the LOW level signal to the HI level signal. When the game ball does not generate a winning to the lower operation opening 24, the present winning processing is ended as it is.

  If the gaming ball is in the lower operation opening 24, the value stored in the second holding number storage area NB of the second holding area Rb is read in step S207, and the value is held in the second holding area Rb. It is determined whether the stored second starting ball holding number NB is less than "255". The value “255” is an upper limit value capable of storing the hold information in the second hold area Rb, as described above. When the second starting ball storage number NB is equal to or more than the upper limit value, the winning process is ended.

  If the second starting ball holding number NB is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S208, where the second starting ball holding number NB is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S209, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S103 are the first of the vacant reserve areas Rb1 to Rb255 of the second reserve area Rb. The reserved areas Rb1 to Rb255 are stored in the reserved areas Rb1 to Rb255 corresponding to the number of pending storages added by 1 in step S208.

  In the subsequent step S209, a second hold number increase command is set, and the present winning process is ended. The second hold number increase command is a command for specifying the timing at which the hold information corresponding to the winning on the lower operation port 24 is acquired by the display control device 100. The second hold number increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12) described later. The voice emission control device 90 transmits the second hold number increase command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the second hold number increase command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S304: YES), the display control device 100 is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S305. The second display holding memory number lbN1 is incremented by one. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 can specify the number of pieces of suspension information stored in the second display area Rb from the above-mentioned second display side suspension storage number lbN1.

  In the subsequent step S306, information on the occurrence of a winning on the lower operation port 24 is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the same number as the number of pieces of suspension information stored in the second suspension area Rb after the occurrence of a winning on the lower operation port 24 is displayed in the second suspension number display area Gb.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the normal processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated in response to the power-on is performed. In the normal process, the main process of the game is performed. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S401 to S407 is executed as periodic processing of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S409 and S410 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a winning ball command, and if the winning ball command is set, transmits it to the payout control device 70. In addition, when a command for effect such as a command corresponding to an effect for game circulation or a command corresponding to an effect for opening / closing execution mode is set, it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  In the subsequent step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by one, and the counter value is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In the following step S403, game number control processing for advancing the game of each game number is executed. In the game number control process, determination of success or failure is performed, and setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 31, display control of the display portions 33, 34 and the like are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S404, a game state transition process is executed. By this gaming state transition processing, the gaming state is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S405, a process for supporting a combination for driving and controlling the motorized accessory 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is performed. In the processing for electronic-support combination, the electronic-arm opening of whether or not the electric-powered combination 24a is opened using the numerical information acquired from the electric-powered opening-off counter C4 stored in the electronic-arm holding area 64c of the RAM 64 A lottery is performed, and in the case where the electronic combination release state is won, the opening and closing process of the electrically operated jack 24a is executed. In addition, display control of the display part 35 for bonus is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electronic combination open lottery.

  Here, as described above, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the motorized character 24a, and transition to one of the support modes is performed in the game state transition processing. It will be. In this case, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, and the low frequency support mode is set when the flag is not set to “1”.

  In the electronic-support-support process, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode is set by determining whether the high-frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. Then, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the motorized combination 24a is in the open state is set more frequently when the electronic-arm open state is won than in the low-frequency support mode. Set the open time longer. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric jack open state is won and the open state of the motorized accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state ends. The closing time until is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

  In the following step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball emission control process, a predetermined emission period is performed on the condition that the emission permission signal output from the power supply and emission control device 80 is input based on the emission operation being performed on the emission handle 51. The solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 is excited once (for example, 0.6 sec). As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In the following step S407, it is determined whether the power failure flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". The occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 65, and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62, whereby the power failure flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" and erased in the next main processing. Flag.

  If “1” is not set in the power failure flag, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has ended, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S408. That is, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. That is, in step S409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S410, the variation type counter CS is updated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 407 that the power failure flag is set to “1”, it means that the power is shut off, so that the process at the time of power interruption after step S411 is executed. That is, in step S411, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S412, and after the access to RAM 64 is prohibited in step S413, the power is completely shut off and processing is performed. Continues an infinite loop until it can not execute.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game number control process executed in step S403 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the game play control process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In the game number control process, it is first determined in step S501 whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. When in the opening / closing execution mode, the main game is performed without executing the processing of step S502 and subsequent processing, that is, the processing for starting the game turn from step S503 to step S505 and the processing for advancing the game round from step S506 to step S511. End the control process. That is, when in the opening / closing execution mode, the game play is not started regardless of whether or not a winning to the operation openings 23 and 24 has occurred.

  If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the upper operation port display unit 33 or the lower operation port display unit 34 is fluctuating display, that is, one game cycle is in progress. It is determined whether or not.

  If the upper operation opening display unit 33 or the lower operation opening display unit 34 is not in a fluctuating display mode, the process proceeds to the game time start processing of step S503 to step S505. In the processing for starting a game, in step S503, the values stored in the first holding number storage area NA of the first holding area Ra and the second holding number storage area NB of the second holding area Rb are read out first, Whether the first starting holding ball number NA stored in the first holding area Ra and the second starting holding ball number NB stored in the second holding area Rb are "0" It is determined whether or not. If the first starting ball holding number NA and the second starting ball holding number NB are “0”, this means that the holding information is not obtained, and thus the game play control process ends.

  If one of the first starting ball holding number NA and the second starting ball holding number NB is not "0", one of the first holding ball storage area 64a is selected in step S504. Executes data setting processing for setting data stored in the storage area Ra or data stored in the second storage area Rb of the storage ball storage area 64a for variable display, and further to step S505. After the variable display on the display portions 33 and 34 and the variable start process for starting the variable display on the symbol display device 31 are executed, the game play control process is ended.

  The data setting process of step S504 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing data setting processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, at step S601, the value stored in the second holding number storage area NB of the second holding area Rb is read out, and the second starting holding ball number NB stored in the second holding area Rb is stored. It is determined whether it is "0". In the present embodiment, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is digested earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. In detail, when the hold information is stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, respectively, all the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb is digested before the first It processes the hold information stored in the hold area Ra.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S601, the first starting ball storage number NA is subtracted by 1 in step S602. In the following step S603, data (each numerical value information) is moved from the first holding area Ra1 of the first holding area Ra to the execution area AE.

  In the subsequent step S604, a process of shifting the data stored in the first holding area Ra (that is, holding information) is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first holding area Ra1 to the 255th holding area Ra255 of the first holding area Ra to the lower area side, The data in the first holding area Ra1 is cleared, and the data in the first holding area Ra is shifted in the order of the nth holding area → the n−1th holding area.

  In the subsequent step S605, a first hold information erase command is set, and the data setting process is ended. The first suspension information deletion command is a command for specifying that one suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra is erased by the display control device 100. The first suspension information deletion command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 transmits the first hold information deletion command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the first hold information deletion command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S307: YES), the display control device 100 is held in the work RAM 104 in step S308. The first display holding memory number laN1 is decremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S309, information for deleting one piece of suspension information corresponding to the upper operation opening 23 is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, after one hold information corresponding to the upper operation port 23 is erased, the same number as the number of the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is displayed in the first hold number display area Ga .

  Returning to the explanation of the data setting process (FIG. 14), if the result of the determination in step S601 is negative, in step S606, the second starting reserved ball number NB is decremented by one. In the following step S607, data is moved from the first holding area Rb1 of the second holding area Rb to the execution area AE.

  In the subsequent step S608, processing for shifting data in the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first reserve area Rb1 to the 255th reserve area Rb255 of the second reserve area Rb toward the lower area, and the data shift process is performed for the second reserve area Rb. The data in the first holding area Rb1 is cleared, and the data in the second holding area Rb is shifted in the order of the nth holding area → the n−1th holding area.

  In step S609, a second hold information deletion command is set. The second hold information erase command is a command for specifying that one hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is erased by the display control apparatus 100. The second hold information deletion command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the process of step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 transmits the second hold information erase command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the second hold information deletion command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S310: YES), the display control device 100 is held on hold in the work RAM 104 in step S311. The second display holding memory number lbN1 is decremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S312, information for deleting one piece of holding information corresponding to the lower operation port 24 is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, after one hold information corresponding to the lower operation port 24 is erased, the same number as the number of the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is displayed in the second hold number display area Gb .

  Returning to the description of the data setting process (FIG. 14), after executing the process of step S609, "1" is set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64 in step S610, and the data setting process is ended. The lower operation opening opportunity flag is a flag for specifying that the game run has been started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the lower operation opening 24. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is referred to in the type determination process at the time of the big hit when the winning in the upper operation opening 23 is triggered and the big winning when the winning in the lower operation opening 24 is triggered. The type of distribution table is different. By determining whether “1” is set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 determines which operation opening 23, of the upper operation opening 23 and the lower operation opening 24. It becomes possible to specify whether the game run has been started, triggered by the winning of the game 24. As a result, when the jackpot is won, the main control device 60 determines which of the distribution tables for the upper operating port and the lower operating port in the type determination process should be referred to. It becomes possible to specify with MPU62 of.

  Returning to the explanation of the game play control process (FIG. 13), when the process of step S504 is executed, the variation start process is executed in step S505. The variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, at step S701, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is grasped. In the following step S702, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying that the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Although the details will be described later, when the success or failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode at the end of the open / close execution mode, “1” is set to the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64. If the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the success or failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and if the high probability mode flag is set to “1” to the RAM 64, the success or failure lottery mode is low probability mode It becomes.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S702, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S701 is included in the value corresponding to the jackpot winning with reference to the probability table for low probability mode in the ROM 63 in step S703. Determine if there is.

  When the negative determination is made in step S702, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped in step S701 is included in the value corresponding to the big hit, with reference to the success or failure table for the high probability mode in the ROM 63 in step S704. Determine if there is.

  When the jackpot is won in the process of step S703 or the process of step S704 (step S705: YES), the type determination process is executed in step S706. The type determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the type determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S801, information for distribution determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. In the following step S802, it is determined whether "1" is set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64 or not. As described above, the lower operation opening opportunity flag is a flag for specifying that the game play has been started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the lower operation opening 24. At the timing at which the lower operating opening 24 has a winning, the lower operating opening trigger flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1".

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, the value of jackpot type counter C2 determined in step S801 is 6R normal jackpot result and 6R probability variation jackpot result with reference to the distribution table for the upper operating port in step S803. Among them, it is determined which jackpot result it corresponds to.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the value of jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step S801 is 16R normal jackpot result and 16R probability variation big jackpot in step S804 with reference to the distribution table for the lower operation port in step S804. Of the results, it is determined which jackpot result it corresponds to.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 15), after the process of step S706 is performed, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is performed in step S707. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, information of a pattern to be stopped and displayed on the upper operation opening display section 33 in the gaming round related to the start of fluctuation this time , And from the stop result table for the first jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and stores the specified information in the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, when the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the information on the pattern aspect to be stopped and displayed on the lower operation opening display portion 34 in the game turn relating to the start of fluctuation this time is ROM 63 The stop result table for the second jackpot result stored in advance is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64.

  In the stop result table for the first big hit result and the stop result table for the second big hit result, the types of patterns of the symbols displayed to be stopped on the upper operating opening display unit 33 or the lower operating opening display unit 34 are In step S 707, information on the pattern aspect according to the type of the jackpot result identified in step S 706 is stored in the RAM 64.

  In the subsequent step S708, in step S706, a process corresponding to the process result of the type determination process is executed. In the process corresponding to the process result of the type determination process, a process of setting “1” to a flag corresponding to the type of the identified jackpot result is executed. Specifically, when it is specified that the 6R normal jackpot result is specified, the 6R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, and when it is specified that the 16R normal jackpot result is specified, the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is specified. When "1" is set and it is specified that it is 6R probability variation big hit result, when "1" is set to 6R probability variation big hit flag of RAM 64 and it is specified that it is 16R probability variation big hit result, 16R probability variation big hit of RAM 64 Set the flag to "1".

  If a negative determination is made in step S705, in step S709, stop result setting processing for the removal result is executed. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the embodiment of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the upper operation opening display section 33 in the game round related to the start of fluctuation this time The information is specified from the stop result table for outliers stored in advance in the ROM 63, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. On the other hand, when “1” is set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the ROM 63 displays information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the lower operation opening display unit 34 in the game round related to the start of fluctuation this time. Are specified from the stop result table for outliers stored in advance, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64.

  When the process of step S708 is performed or when the process of step S709 is performed, a setting process of the fluctuation display time (variation display period) is performed in step S710. In this process, first, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Next, it is determined whether reach display occurs on the display screen G in the current game run. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the gaming number relating to the start of the change is the jackpot result. Even in the case of the outlier result, when the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the change display time corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the reach generation change display time table stored in the ROM 63, and the change display The time is set in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The said fluctuation | variation display time counter is a counter for specifying the fluctuation | variation display time of this game time in MPU62 of the main control apparatus 60. FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display is not generated, the reach non-occurrence change display time table stored in the ROM 63 is referred to, and the change display time corresponding to the value of the present change type counter CS is acquired The fluctuation display time is set in the fluctuation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. Incidentally, the fluctuation display time that can be acquired with reference to the non-reach generation fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation fluctuation display time table.

  In addition, the variation display time of the game times corresponding to the reach occurrence is configured not to depend on the first start holding ball number NA and the second start holding ball number NB. For example, the variation display time of the game time is not set to be shorter as the number of the first start holding ball number NA and the number of the second start holding ball number NB is larger.

  In addition, the variation display time of the game times corresponding to the non-reach occurrence, until the number of the first starting holding ball number NA and the number of the second starting holding ball number NB becomes a predetermined number, the first starting holding ball number NA and the first (2) The number of start-holding ball number NB is set to be short each time it reaches a specific number, and the number of the first start-holding ball number NA and the number of the second start-holding ball number NB become more than the predetermined number , Is set to the shortest variation display time. The predetermined number is set to a number that is difficult to reach even if the firing operation is continued for a long period of time. Specifically, the specific number is set to 20, 40, 60 and 80, and the predetermined number is set to 100. The variation display time does not change until the next specific number or predetermined number is reached. Therefore, in this embodiment, the numbers of the first starting holding ball number NA and the second starting holding ball number NB are “1 to 19”, “20 to 39”, “40 to 59”, “ The fluctuation display time is set to be shorter in the order of 60 to 79, "80 to 99", and "100 or more". According to this configuration, it is possible to specify the approximate number of the first starting hold ball number NA and the number of the second start holding ball number NB from the variation display time of the game times corresponding to the non-reach occurrence.

  Further, when the number of the first starting ball holding number NA and the number of the second starting ball holding number NB become equal to or more than a predetermined number, the shortest variation display time is set thereafter. As described above, the predetermined number is set to a number that is difficult to reach even if the firing operation is continued for a long period of time. Here, if the variable display time is shortened even after the number of the first starting ball holding number NA and the second starting ball holding number NB exceeds the predetermined number, it is actually set. It is necessary to store almost no variation display time in the non-reach variation display time table of the ROM 63. In that respect, according to the present configuration, when the number of the first starting holding ball number NA and the number of the second starting holding ball number NB become equal to or more than the predetermined number, the shortest variation display time is set thereafter. It is not necessary to store the variation display time which is hardly set in the table in the non-reach variation generation display time table of the ROM 63. Thus, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the ROM 63 of the main control device 60 from being unnecessarily increased.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach non-range is selected so that the short fluctuation display time is selected as compared with the situation where the number of holding information is the same as the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variation display time table for generation is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variable display time does not change according to the first start holding ball number NA, the second start holding ball number NB, and the support mode. It may be. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation display time at the time of reach occurrence.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode and the hold information that triggered the start of the current game run is the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb, the reach is not reached in the game run The variation display time set when the occurrence and the second start suspension ball number NB is “0” is set when the reach non-occurrence and the second initiation suspension ball number NB is larger than “0” in the above situation It is set to be longer than the variable display time, and shorter than the variable display time set when reach is generated in the above situation.

  According to this configuration, the variable display time set when reach does not occur in the above situation and the second start pending ball count NB is “0” is in the above situation with no reach and the second start pending sphere number NB Since it is set to be longer than the variable display time set when the value is more than "0", when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the game triggered by the winning of the upper operation opening 23 It is possible to increase the probability that holding information is stored in the second holding area Rb before the times are started. This makes it possible to lower the probability of occurrence of a game run triggered by a winning on the upper operation opening 23 in the high frequency support mode situation.

  Further, according to this configuration, the variable display time set when reach does not occur in the above situation and the second starting suspension ball number NB is “0” is set when reach is occurring in the above situation It is set to be shorter than the variable display time. As described above, if reach is generated, there is a possibility that jackpot will be won, but you can expect to win jackpot but if it is not reach, jackpot will not be won, so you can expect jackpot winning Absent. Here, the variable display time set when reach does not occur in the above situation and the second starting suspension ball number NB is “0” is longer than the variable display time set when reach is occurring in the above situation If it is a long composition, although it does not become a jackpot winning, it feels frustrating that the time required for the effect to end is long. In that respect, according to this configuration, the variable display time set when reach does not occur in the above situation and the second starting suspension ball number NB is “0” is set when reach is occurring in the above situation Since it is set to be shorter than the variable display time, it is possible to prevent long-term effects that can not be expected from winning a big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling frustrated with the occurrence of effects that can not be expected in the jackpot win for a long time.

  As described above, the variation display time of each game is determined using the presence / absence of reach, the number of suspension information, and the value of the variation type counter CS as parameters. However, the fluctuation display time of each game time is the content of other suspension information, specifically, information for jackpot determination included in other suspension information, information for type determination, and information for reach determination as parameters It is decided without doing.

  After the process of step S710 is performed, a change command and a type command are set in step S711. The fluctuation command includes information on fluctuation display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach generation fluctuation display time table, and thus fluctuation Even if the command for the command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach, the voice emission control device 90 can specify the presence or absence of the reach from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. Note that the change command may include information directly indicating the presence or absence of reach.

  In addition, the type command includes information on a game result. In other words, the classification command includes any information of 6R normal jackpot result information, 6R probability variation jackpot result information, 16R regular jackpot result information, and 16R probability variation jackpot result information as game result information Be

  The fluctuation command and the type command set in step S711 are transmitted to the audio light emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Based on the received type command, the voice emission control device 90 identifies which one of the 6R normal big hit result, the 6R probability big hit result, the 16R normal big hit result, and the 16R probability big hit result, based on the received type command. .

  In the case of any of 6R normal jackpot result, 6R probability variation jackpot result, 16R regular jackpot result, and 16R probability variation jackpot result, the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of jackpot result is executed. Specifically, first, when the type of the big hit result of this time is 6R normal big hit result and 16R normal big hit result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same even symbols is established on one valid line L1 to L5 Is determined as the information on the stop result this time. In this case, the types of even symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In addition, when the type of the big hit result of this time is 6R probability variation big hit result and 16R probability variation big hit result, the information corresponding to the stop result where the combination of the same odd symbol is established on one valid line L1 to L5 Determined as stop result information. In this case, the types of odd symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In addition, when the current game result is a result of the out-of-order, the out-side symbol determination processing is executed. Specifically, based on the content of the change command, it is determined whether or not it is a game round related to the occurrence of the off reach display, and in the case of a game round related to the occurrence of the off reach display, one valid line The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is removed on L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the type of combination of out-of-reach reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Moreover, in this determination, the stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is not stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined. In addition, when it is not the game time which relates to the occurrence of the off reach indication, the combination of the same symbol does not stop display on any effective line L1-L5, furthermore the off reach symbol combination stops Information corresponding to the non-displayed stop result is determined as information of the current stop result.

  Next, based on the received command for variation and type command, an effect pattern of game times related to the start of variation is determined. In this case, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 of the sound emission control device 90, the effect continuation period corresponding to the currently received variable command and type command is selected, and Select content The MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the game round related to the start of fluctuation and the output control of the speaker unit 55 according to the determined effect pattern.

  Next, the display control device 100 displays the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of the symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of the jackpot result or the symbol determination processing for removal, and the pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the game round related to the fluctuation start. Send to

  Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for causing the symbol display device 31 to provide the effects of the game cycle related to the start of fluctuation. The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 each time the image update timing predetermined in accordance with the table is reached (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). As a result, in the symbol display device 31, according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, effects for the game circulation are executed, and the stop result determined by the MPU 92 is finally displayed as a stop Be done.

  After the process of step S711 is performed, the variation display of the pattern is started in one of the display units 33 and 34 in step S712, and the variation start process is ended. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the variation display of the pattern is started on the upper operation opening display section 33, and “1” is set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64. When “is set, the variation display of the pattern is started on the lower operation opening display section 34.

  Returning to the explanation of the game number control process (FIG. 13), when the upper operation port display unit 33 or the lower operation port display unit 34 is displaying a change, the change display time of the game time has elapsed in step S506. It is determined whether it has been done. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64 is “0”.

  If the variation display time of the game play has not elapsed, processing for variation display is executed in step S507. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the display mode in the upper operation opening display unit 33 is changed, and “1” is displayed in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64. If it is set, the display mode on the lower operation opening display unit 34 is changed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S506, the variation end process is executed in step S508. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the information stored in the RAM 64 in the process of step S 707 or S 709 is specified, and the pattern aspect corresponding to the information Is controlled so as to be displayed on the upper operating opening display unit 33. On the other hand, when “1” is set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the information stored in the RAM 64 is specified in the process of step S707 or step S709, and the pattern aspect corresponding to the information is lower activated. The lower operation opening display unit 34 is controlled to be displayed on the mouth display unit 34.

  In the following step S509, a change end command is set. The change end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 transmits the received change end command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. In the display control device 100, by receiving the change end command, the combination of the final stop symbols in the game is displayed (final stop display).

  When the process of step S509 is executed, it is determined whether or not the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" at step S510. If a negative determination is made in step S510, the game play control process ends. When an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the lower operation opening opportunity flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S511.

<Playing state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process executed in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether the game state is in the open / close execution mode. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the upper operation opening display unit 33 or the lower operation opening display unit 34 of 1 is finished. When it is not the timing when the variable display ends, the main game state transition processing ends.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S 903 whether the success or failure result of the game round ended this time corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R regular jackpot flag, or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64. As described above, when the jackpot is won in response to the winning of the upper operation opening 23, "1" is set to one of the 6R normal jackpot flag and the 6R probability variation jackpot flag. Further, when a big hit is made in response to the winning of the lower operation port 24, “1” is set to any one of the 16R normal big hit flag and the 16R probability variation big hit flag. If it does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, the values stored in the first holding count storage area NA of the first holding area Ra and the second holding count storage area NB of the second holding area Rb are read out in step S904. Whether the first starting holding ball number NA stored in the first holding area Ra and the second starting holding ball number NB stored in the second holding area Rb are "0" It is determined whether or not.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S904, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 6R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 in step S905. When an affirmative determination is made in step S905, "6" is set to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S906. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games to be executed within the range of one open / close execution mode by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S906, "1000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 as a standby period for opening. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, the waiting period for opening is 2 seconds. However, the waiting period is optional.

  If a negative determination is made in step S905, "16" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S907, and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is Set "1000".

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S904, a jackpot winning number identification process is executed in step S908. The jackpot winning number identification process will be described with reference to FIG. In the jackpot number identification process, how much the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the suspension information to be subjected to the determination of whether to add the number of rounds in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 Is a process for identifying In the present embodiment, when the suspension information to be determined whether to add the number of rounds includes suspension information corresponding to the big hit, according to the number of suspension information corresponding to the big win. The number of rounds is added. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the jackpot winning number identification process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". As described above, when the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, the low probability mode is set, and when the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the high probability mode is set.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the value stored in the first holding count storage area NA of the first holding area Ra is read out in step S1002, and the first start stored in the first holding area Ra is stored. It is determined whether the number of holding balls NA is "0". When an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the jackpot winning number identification process is ended as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the first jackpot information identification process is executed in step S1003. The first jackpot information identification process will be described with reference to FIG. The first jackpot information identification process is a process for executing a process of judging whether or not to hold the number of rounds stored in the first holding area Ra. . FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot information identification process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S1101, the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The first judgment processing number counter refers to the hold information stored in the first holding area Ra, which is the target of the process of judging whether the number of rounds is to be added by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 or not. It is a counter for specifying pending | holding area Ra1-Ra255 which performs a process. The initial value of the first determination processing number counter is set to “0”.

  In step S1102, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 in the first holding area Ra is grasped. In the present embodiment, the value of the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 corresponds to the holding areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first holding area Ra. Specifically, when the first determination processing number counter is “1”, the first suspension area Ra1 of the first storage area Ra corresponds, and the first determination processing number counter is “255”. , 255th reservation area Ra 255 of the first holding area Ra corresponds. In step S1102, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 corresponding to the value of the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is specifically grasped.

  In the following step S1103, it is determined whether the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". The 6R normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result which is triggered to shift to the open / close execution mode by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 is the 6R normal jackpot result, and the 16R normal The jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result that has been triggered to shift to the open / close execution mode by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is the 16R normal jackpot result.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, it is determined in step S1104 whether "1" is set in the pending change probability big hit flag of the RAM 64 or not. The said pending change probability large hit flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 refers to the success / failure table for the high probability mode to perform the success / failure determination processing.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1104, it is determined in step S1105 whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined in step S1101 corresponds to a jackpot win, with reference to the probability table for the low probability mode. Do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, it is determined in step S1106 whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S1101 corresponds to a jackpot win, with reference to the probability table for the high probability mode. Do.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1103, it is determined in step S1107 whether "1" is set in the on-hold normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 or not. The in-hold normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 refers to the low or high probability table for the low probability mode to perform the yes or no determination process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1107, it is determined in step S1108 whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined in step S1101 corresponds to a jackpot win, with reference to the success or failure table for the high probability mode. Do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined in step S1101 corresponds to a jackpot win with reference to the probability table for the low probability mode. Do.

  If a big hit is won in the process of step S1105, the process of step S1106, the process of step S1108, or the process of step S1109 (step S1110: YES), the first counter provided in various counter areas 64b of RAM 64 in step S1111. The jackpot number counter is incremented by one. The first big hit number counter is the hold information of the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first hold area Ra that is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a counter for specifying how much the held information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included therein.

  In the subsequent step S1112, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, first, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 corresponding to the value of the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped. Next, with reference to the distribution table for the upper operating opening, it is specified which jackpot result the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped above corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result and the 6R probability variation jackpot result Do.

  Here, in the judgment processing whether or not to add the number of rounds in order to distinguish from the case where 6R normal big hit result or 6R probability variation big hit result in the judgment process of the holding information that becomes the start of game times When it is usually a big hit result, it is expressed as 6R normal big hit result within the hold, and when it becomes a 6R probability variation big hit result in the judgment processing whether to add the number of rounds, with the 6R probability change big hit result within the hold Expressed.

  In the process of step S1112, when the within 6R normal big hit results in the suspension (step S1113: YES), “1” is set only in the 6R normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 or the 16R normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 in step S1114. Only if "1" is set, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag and the hold normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are set to "1", or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 and the normality jackpot flag within the retention "1" It is determined whether or not is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1114, then the 6R normal jackpot flag and the pending probability change jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are set to "1" in step S1115 or the 16R normal jackpot flag and the pending probability change jackpot flag of the RAM 64 " It is determined whether "1" is set. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1115, the pending change probability big hit flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1116.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1115, then in step S1117, "1" is set in the on-hold normal big hit flag of the RAM 64. The case where the negative determination is made in step S1115 is a state in which "1" is set only in the 6R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1113, "1" is set only in the 6R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 in step S1118, or "1" is set only in the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64, or the RAM 64 It is determined whether the 6R normal jackpot flag and the pending indeterminate probability variation jackpot flag are set to “1” or the 16R normal jackpot flag and the in-hold probability variation variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are set to “1”.

If a negative determination is made in step S1118, the 6R probability variation big hit flag and the hold within normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 are set to "1" in the step S1119, or the 16R probability variation big hit flag and within hold normal volume hit flag of the RAM 64 " It is determined whether "1" is set. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1119, the in-hold normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1120.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1119, "1" is set in the pending probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 in step S1121. The case where the negative determination is made in step S1119 is a situation in which "1" is set only in the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64.

  If the negative determination is made in step S1110, the positive determination is made in step S1114, the processing in step S1116 is executed, the processing in step S1117 is performed, the positive determination in step S1118, the processing in step S1120 is performed. If it is executed or if the processing of step S1121 is executed, whether or not the value of the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1122 is the same as the first starting hold ball number NA Determine if If a negative determination is made in step S1122, the processing in steps S1101 to S1121 is performed again. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1122, the present first jackpot information identification process is ended.

  According to this configuration, when the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds are the first holding area Ra, they are stored in the first holding area Ra. All pending information is subject to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds. According to the configuration, it is possible to easily increase the number of rounds.

  According to this configuration, the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is set in the hold information acquired until the end of the game round corresponding to the jackpot win. Here, assuming that the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is set from among the hold information acquired until the game round corresponding to the big hit is started, The hold information acquired after the game run corresponding to the jackpot win is started is not the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. In this case, it is not possible for the player to continue the firing operation from the start to the end of the game run corresponding to the jackpot win. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the suspension information to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds from the suspension information acquired until the end of the game corresponding to the jackpot win is set. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to perform the firing operation continuously even while the game round corresponding to the big hit is performed.

  Returning to the explanation of the jackpot winning number identification process (FIG. 18), when a negative determination is made in step S1001, the value stored in the second holding number storage area NB of the second holding area Rb is read out in step S1004 2) It is determined whether or not the second starting holding ball number NB stored on hold in the holding area Rb is larger than "1". If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the jackpot winning number identification process is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, a second jackpot information identification process is executed in step S1005. The second jackpot information identification process will be described with reference to FIG. The second jackpot pending information identification process is a process for executing the process of determining the propriety of the process for deciding whether to add the number of rounds stored in the second pending area Rb. is there. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the second jackpot information identification process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, at step S1201, the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The second judgment processing number counter refers to the hold information stored in the second holding area Rb that is the target of the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a counter for specifying pending areas Rb1 to Rb 254 to be processed. The initial value of the second determination processing number counter is set to “0”.

  In step S1202, the value of the corresponding big-hit random number counter C1 in the second holding area Rb is grasped. In the present embodiment, the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 corresponds to the holding areas Rb1 to Rb 254 of the second holding area Rb. Specifically, when the second determination processing number counter is “1”, the first storage area Rb1 of the second storage area Rb corresponds, and the second determination processing number counter is “254”. , And the 254 th reserve area Ra 254 of the second reserve area Rb. In step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold areas Rb1 to Rb 254 corresponding to the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is specifically grasped.

  The processes of steps S1203 to S1209 are the same as the processes of steps S1103 to S1109.

  When a big hit is won in the process of step S1205, the process of step S1206, the process of step S1208, or the process of step S1209 (step S1210: YES), the various counter areas 64b of RAM 64 are provided in step S1211. The second big hit number counter is incremented by one. The second big hit number counter is the hold information of the hold area Rb1 to Rb254 of the second hold area Rb which is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a counter for specifying how much the held information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included therein.

  When the process of step S1211 is executed, the type determination process is executed in step S1212. In the type determination process, first, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserve areas Rb1 to Rb 254 corresponding to the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped. Next, with reference to the distribution table for the lower opening, it is specified which of the 16R normal big hit results and the 16 R probability variation big hit results, the value of the big hit type counter C2 grasped above corresponds to which big hit result Do.

  Here, in the judgment processing whether to add the number of rounds, in order to distinguish from the 16R normal big hit result or the 16R probability variation big hit result in the judgment process of the hold information that becomes the start of the game times In the case of big hit results, it is expressed that within 16R normal big hit results within the hold, and when within 16R probability variation big hit results in the judgment processing whether to add the number of rounds, within the 16R probability variation big hit results within the hold Express.

  In the process of step S1212, when the pending 16R normal jackpot result is obtained (step S1213: YES), “1” is set to only the 6R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 in step S1214. Only if "1" is set, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag and the hold normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are set to "1", or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 and the normality jackpot flag within the retention "1" It is determined whether or not is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1214, then the 6R normal jackpot flag and the pending probability change big hit flag of the RAM 64 are set to "1" in step S1215 or the 16R normal jackpot flag and the pending probability change jackpot flag of the RAM 64 " It is determined whether "1" is set. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, in step S1216, the pending change probability big hit flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0".

  If a negative determination is made in step S1215, then in step S1217, "1" is set in the with-hold normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64. The case where the negative determination is made in step S1215 is a situation in which "1" is set only in the 6R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1213, "1" is set only in the 6R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 in step S1218, or "1" is set only in the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64, or the RAM 64 It is determined whether the 6R normal jackpot flag and the pending indeterminate probability variation jackpot flag are set to “1” or the 16R normal jackpot flag and the in-hold probability variation variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are set to “1”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1218, the 6R probability variation big hit flag and the hold within normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 are set to "1" in the step S1219, or the 16R probability variation big hit flag and within hold normal volume hit flag of the RAM 64 " It is determined whether "1" is set. When an affirmative determination is made in step S 1219, the in-hold normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to “0” in step S 1220.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1219, "1" is set in the pending probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 in step S1221. The case where the negative determination is made in step S1219 is a situation where only the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1".

  According to the present embodiment, in the situation where the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the pending 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result in the retention causes the RAM 64 to be suspended. In a situation where the internal probability variation jackpot flag is set to “1” and the retention internal variation probability big hit flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the 6R normal jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result of the retention becomes the RAM 64 The pending change probability big hit flag is cleared to "0". Also, in a situation where the 6R probability variation big hit flag or the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, if the 6R normal big hit result or the 16R normal big hit result is obtained in the hold, In a situation where "1" is set and the in-hold normal jackpot flag of RAM 64 is set to "1", the in-hold normal jackpot flag of RAM 64 is obtained if the in-hold 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result occurs. Is cleared to "0". According to the configuration, the process for determining whether the number of rounds is to be added is determined whether the on-hold information is subjected to the process of determining whether the on-hold information actually triggers the start of the game round It becomes possible to perform with reference to the success or failure table corresponding to the mode. As a result, the jackpot probability in the process of judging whether or not to add the number of rounds, and the hold information to be subjected to the process of judging whether to add the number of rounds are actually game times. It becomes possible to prevent the jackpot win probability in the success / failure determination process performed when the start trigger is different from being different.

  If the negative determination is made in step S1210, the positive determination is made in step S1214, the processing of step S1216 is executed, the processing of step S1217 is performed, the positive determination is made in step S1218, the processing of step S1220 is performed. When executed or when the processing of step S1221 is executed, the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1222 is the same as the second starting hold ball number NB-1 It is determined whether it is a value. If a negative determination is made in step S1222, the processes of steps S1201 to S1221 are performed again. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1222, the present second jackpot information identification process is ended.

  According to this configuration, when the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds are the second holding area Rb, the holding stored in the second holding area Rb Out of the information, one hold information is left, and in the other hold information, the yes / no decision processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, the pending information subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is cleared to “0” after the success or failure determination process is performed. Here, assuming that all the suspension information stored in the second suspension area Rb is subjected to the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds is to be added, the game times to be executed after the open / close execution mode is ended. There is a possibility that it becomes a thing triggered by a prize to the upper operation opening 23. As described above, when the jackpot is won with the winning of the upper operation opening 23, the number of rounds becomes 6R. In that respect, according to the present configuration, when the second hold area Rb is the target of the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds, one hold information stored in the second hold area Rb In the remaining state, the pass / fail judgment processing is performed on the other hold information. This makes it possible to start a game run triggered by a winning on the lower operation port 24 after the end of the open / close execution mode.

  According to the present embodiment, in the case of the low probability mode, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds are set to the first holding area Ra, and the high probability In the case of the mode, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds are set as the second holding area Rb. Here, in the low probability mode, there is a possibility that the number of holding information stored in the first holding area Ra may be larger than the number of holding information stored in the second holding area Rb. In the case of the high probability mode, the number of pending information stored in the second pending area Rb is likely to be greater than the number of pending information stored in the first pending area Ra. . Therefore, according to the configuration, the holding areas Ra and Rb on the side where the number of stored holding information tends to increase is set as the target of the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds. It becomes possible to make it easy to generate a situation where numbers are easily added.

  Also, as described above, the number of rounds of round games given at the time of jackpot winning triggered by the suspension information stored in the second suspension area Rb is the suspension stored in the first suspension area Ra It is larger than the number of rounds of the round game given at the time of the jackpot winning with information. Therefore, in the case of the low probability mode, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds are set to the first holding area Ra and the number of rounds is the high probability mode. By having a configuration in which the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to be added are set to the second holding area Rb, the jackpot is won in the high probability mode It is possible to grant benefits for

  According to the present embodiment, even if the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb in the low probability mode, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is targeted. The process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is not performed. Also, in the high probability mode, even if the hold information is stored in the first hold area Ra, the number of rounds for the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is added. The determination process of whether or not is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, one of the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is set to one according to the type of the current lottery mode. As a result, it becomes possible to make the types of the operation openings 23, 24 different from each other wishing the game ball to win according to the type of the current success or failure lottery mode.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 17), after executing the process of step S908, the special round number setting process is executed in step S909. The special round number setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The special round number setting process is a process performed to set the number of rounds. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special round number setting process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether the first determination processing number counter and the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are "0".
If an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not "1" is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 6R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, "6" is set to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1303, and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is Set "1000".

  When a negative determination is made in step S1302, "16" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1304, and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is displayed. Set "1000".

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the first big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than "0". As described above, the first big hit number counter is stored in the holding areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first holding area Ra, which is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 It is a counter for specifying how much the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is included in the stored suspension information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined in step S1306 whether the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 6R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". When an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1307 is multiplied by six and the value obtained by adding "6" to the value is set. "1000" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The jackpot winning number is a value set in the first jackpot number counter.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1306, the number of jackpot wins is multiplied by 6 in round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64b of RAM 64 in step S1308, and a value obtained by adding "16" to the value is set. "1000" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The jackpot winning number is a value set in the first jackpot number counter.

  When the process of step S1307 is executed, or when the process of step S1308 is executed, the first jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1309.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined in step S1310 whether the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than "0". As described above, the second big hit number counter is stored in the hold areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second hold area Rb to be subjected to the process of determining whether the number of rounds is to be added by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a counter for specifying how much the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is included in the stored suspension information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1310, it is determined in step S1311 whether or not "1" is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 6R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1311, in step S1312 the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is multiplied by 16 and the value obtained by adding “6” to the value is set. "1000" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The jackpot winning number is a value set in the second jackpot number counter.

  When the negative determination is made in step S1311, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1313 is multiplied by 16 and the value obtained by adding “16” to the value is set. "1000" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The jackpot winning number is a value set in the second jackpot number counter.

  If the process of step S1312 has been executed, or if the process of step S1313 has been executed, the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1314.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1310, the processing in step S1315 to step S1317 is executed, and the special round number setting processing is ended. The process of the said step S1315-step S1317 is the same as the process of step S1302-step S1304.

  According to the present embodiment, the number of rounds is added when the held information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the held information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. As a result, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to expect the number of rounds to be added. Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the holding areas Ra and Rb targeted for the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds are the first holding area Ra, the within-hold 6R normal large hit in the above determination process A value obtained by multiplying the number of pending information resulting in a result or pending 6R probability variation big hit result by 6 is added to the number of rounds. In addition, when the holding areas Ra and Rb targeted for the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is the second holding area Rb, the within 16R normal big hit result or within 16R probability variation big hit in the above determination process A value obtained by multiplying the number of resulting pending information by 16 is added to the number of rounds. Thus, in the hold information subjected to the determination process whether or not to add the number of rounds, when the hold information is determined to be a big hit, the hold information is given when it actually becomes the start timing of the game round It is possible to add the same number of rounds as the number of rounds.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing (FIG. 17), when the processing of step S909 is executed, the first determination processing number counter and the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S910 It is determined whether it is "0". If the first determination processing number counter and the second determination processing number counter are “0”, it means that the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds has not been performed, so the processing for handling pending information described later Will not run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S910, a pending information response process is executed in step S911. The pending information handling process will be described with reference to FIG. The pending information handling process is a process for clearing “0” the pending information which is the target of the determination process after the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is performed. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the pending information handling process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether the hold areas Ra and Rb storing the hold information subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, it is determined whether the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64 is larger than “0”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, the first start-holding ball number NA is cleared to "0". In the following step S1403, the first holding area Ra is cleared to "0". As a result, all the pending information (in this case, the pending information stored in the first pending area Ra) that is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is cleared to “0”.

  In the subsequent step S1404, a third hold information deletion command is set. The third hold information deletion command is used to specify the timing for clearing “0” the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra stored in the work RAM 104 by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. It is a command. The third hold information deletion command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 transmits the third hold information erase command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the third hold information deletion command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S313: YES), the display control device 100 is held in the work RAM 104 in step S314. The first display side reserved memory number laN1 is cleared to "0".

  In the subsequent step S315, information for stopping the display of the first hold count display area Ga is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, a number corresponding to the number of pieces of suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra in the first suspension number display area Ga is not displayed.

  Returning to the description of the pending information handling process (FIG. 22), when the process of step S1404 is executed, the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1405.

  On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S1401, "1" is set to the 2nd starting pending ball number NB at Step S1406. In the subsequent step S1407, the holding areas Rb1 to Rb 254 targeted for the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds in the second holding area Rb are cleared to "0". Specifically, with reference to the second determination processing number counter provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, a holding area Rb2 higher than the holding areas Rb1 to Rb 254 corresponding to the value of the second determination processing number counter Clear all reserved areas Rb1 to Rb254 except for ~ Rb255 to "0". Specifically, for example, when the second determination processing number counter is “1”, the first suspension area Rb1 of the second holding area Rb is cleared to “0”, and the second determination processing number counter is “254”. In the case, the first holding area Rb1 to the 254th holding area Rb 254 of the second holding area Rb are cleared to “0”.

  In step S1408, the hold information not subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is shifted to the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb.

  In the subsequent step S1409, a fourth hold information erase command is set. The fourth hold information erase command is used to specify the timing at which the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb held on hold in the work RAM 104 by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is “1”. It is a command. The fourth hold information deletion command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 transmits the fourth hold information erase command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the fourth hold information deletion command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S316: YES), the display control device 100 is held in the work RAM 104 in step S317. Set "1" to the second display side reserved storage number lbN1.

  In the subsequent step S318, information for setting the display of the second hold count display area Gb to "1" is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, “1” is displayed in the second hold count display area Gb in correspondence with the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb.

  Returning to the description of the pending information handling process (FIG. 22), when the process of step S1409 is executed, the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1410. This pending information handling process ends.

  According to the present embodiment, in the hold information subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds, only the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not cleared to “0”, but corresponds to the big hit. Not held information is also cleared to "0". Here, if it is configured to clear only the hold information corresponding to the big hit in the hold information which is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds, it is determined whether to add the number of rounds. The player is identified as the out-of-order result of the hold information not cleared “0” among the hold information targeted for processing. In this case, it is necessary to digest the game times that have specified that the success or failure results are out of order. In that respect, according to the present configuration, regardless of the result of the pending information subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds, the pending process that is subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds All information is cleared to "0". As a result, it is specified to the player that the hold result of the hold information which is not cleared “0” in the hold information which is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is out of order. It becomes possible to prevent that it is necessary to digest the game times that have specified that the success or failure result is the out-of-order result.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 17), when the process of step S906 is executed, the process of step S907 is executed, the affirmative determination is made in step S910, or the process of step S911 is executed, In step S912, an opening command is set, and the game state transition process is ended. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes setting processing of effects for the open / close execution mode. The light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the open / close execution mode is performed according to the set effect pattern, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed.

  The sound emission control apparatus 90 transmits to the display control apparatus 100 an open / close execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the setting process of the effect for the open / close execution mode. In the display control device 100, based on the received command for opening / closing execution mode, a data table is read out from the program ROM 103 to be performed by the symbol display device 31 of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode this time. The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 each time the image update timing is reached (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the special winning opening / closing process is executed in step S913. In the special winning opening / closing process, when the special winning opening 22a is closed, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is a timer provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 at "1" or more. Under the condition that the counter T is "0", the large winning opening 22a is opened by setting the variable winning device 22 in the driving state. In the timer counter T, numerical information for the opening time of the special winning opening 22a, numerical information for the opening standby time until the variable winning device 22 is closed from the open state, and then the opening state is continued again. Is set. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated.

  When the special winning opening 22a is open, a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 22a (the timer counter T is "0") or a predetermined number of gaming balls are winning. On the condition that the variable winning device 22 is driven, the driving state of the variable winning device 22 is stopped and the big winning opening 22a is closed. After the processing for closing the special winning opening 22a is executed, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is decremented by one.

  In the following step S914, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If the value of the round counter RC is "0", it is determined in step S915 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0". If the timer counter T is not "0", the present gaming state transition process is ended as it is.

  If the timer counter T is "0", the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S916. The transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether "1" is set in the 6R probability variation big hit flag, the 16R probability variation big hit flag, or the pending probability probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1502 whether "1" is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 or not. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the transition process at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1502, "1" is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 in step S1503, and "1" is set in the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 in the following step S1504, End the transition process at the end of the mode.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1505 whether "1" is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1505, the transition processing at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1506, and the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1507, and the main open / close execution mode ends. End the migration process at time.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing (FIG. 17), when the processing of step S916 is executed, the various flags are cleared to "0" in step S917, and the present gaming state transition processing is ended. Specifically, among the 6R normal big hit flag, 6R positive variation big hit flag, 16R normal big hit flag, 16R positive variation big hit flag, in-hold normal big hit flag, and in-hold probable change big hit flag, a flag in which "1" is set Clear "0".

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the success / failure determination processing is performed in the holding information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds, and the big hit is won in the relevant determination processing. When it becomes, the number of rounds is added according to the number which became the said big hit. This makes it possible to expect the number of rounds to be added when the jackpot result is reached.

  When the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds are the first holding area Ra, all the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra is round It becomes an object of determination processing whether to add a number. According to the configuration, it is possible to easily increase the number of rounds.

  When the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds are the second holding area Rb, one of the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb In the other hold information, the pass / fail judgment processing is performed while leaving the hold information of. Here, when the type of the big hit result of this time becomes the 16R probability variation big hit result, it is the target of the determination processing whether all the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is to add the number of rounds. With this configuration, there is a possibility that the game run executed after the end of the open / close execution mode may be triggered by the winning of the upper operation port 23. As described above, when the jackpot is won with the winning of the upper operation opening 23, the number of rounds becomes 6R. In that respect, according to the present configuration, when the second hold area Rb is the target of the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds, one hold information stored in the second hold area Rb In the remaining state, the pass / fail judgment processing is performed on the other hold information. This makes it possible to start a game run triggered by a winning on the lower operation port 24 after the end of the open / close execution mode.

  When the holding areas Ra and Rb targeted for the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds are the first holding area Ra, in the above determination process, the within 6R normal big hit result or the within 6R probability variation big hit result within the hold A value obtained by multiplying the number of pending information pieces by 6 is added to the number of rounds. In addition, when the holding areas Ra and Rb targeted for the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is the second holding area Rb, the within 16R normal big hit result or within 16R probability variation big hit in the above determination process A value obtained by multiplying the number of resulting pending information by 16 is added to the number of rounds. Thus, in the hold information subjected to the determination process whether or not to add the number of rounds, when the hold information is determined to be a big hit, the hold information is given when it actually becomes the start timing of the game round It is possible to add the same number of rounds as the number of rounds.

  In the case of the low probability mode, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds are set to the first holding area Ra, and in the high probability mode, the number of rounds The holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination process as to whether or not to add are set as the second holding area Rb. Here, in the low probability mode, there is a possibility that the number of holding information stored in the first holding area Ra may be larger than the number of holding information stored in the second holding area Rb. In the case of the high probability mode, the number of pending information stored in the second pending area Rb is likely to be greater than the number of pending information stored in the first pending area Ra. . Therefore, according to the configuration, the holding areas Ra and Rb on the side where the number of stored holding information tends to increase is set as the target of the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds. It becomes possible to make it easy to generate a situation where numbers are easily added. In addition, the number of rounds of the round game given at the time of the jackpot winning triggered by the suspension information stored in the second suspension area Rb is triggered by the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra It is larger than the number of rounds of round games given at the time of jackpot winning. Therefore, in the case of the low probability mode, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds are set to the first holding area Ra and the number of rounds is the high probability mode. By having a configuration in which the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to be added are set to the second holding area Rb, the jackpot is won in the high probability mode It is possible to grant benefits for

  In the low probability mode, even if holding information is stored in the second holding area Rb, whether or not to add the number of rounds for the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb Decision processing is not performed. Also, in the high probability mode, even if the hold information is stored in the first hold area Ra, the number of rounds for the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is added. The determination process of whether or not is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, one of the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is set to one according to the type of the current lottery mode. As a result, it becomes possible to make the types of the operation openings 23, 24 different from each other wishing that the game ball be won according to the type of the current lottery mode.

  In a situation where the 6R normal big hit flag or the 16R normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the pending random variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 is “1” if the pending 6R positive variation big hit result or the pending 16R positive variation big hit result. Is set, and the pending 6R normal jackpot result or the pending 16R normal jackpot result in the pending status in the situation where the pending internal probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the pending internal variation probability big hit flag of the RAM 64 is “ "0" is cleared. Also, in a situation where the 6R probability variation big hit flag or the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, if the 6R normal big hit result or the 16R normal big hit result is obtained in the hold, In a situation where "1" is set and the in-hold normal jackpot flag of RAM 64 is set to "1", the in-hold normal jackpot flag of RAM 64 is obtained if the in-hold 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result occurs. Is cleared to "0". According to the configuration, the process for determining whether the number of rounds is to be added is determined whether the on-hold information is subjected to the process of determining whether the on-hold information actually triggers the start of the game round It becomes possible to perform with reference to the success or failure table corresponding to the mode. As a result, the jackpot probability in the process of judging whether or not to add the number of rounds, and the hold information to be subjected to the process of judging whether to add the number of rounds are actually game times. It becomes possible to prevent the jackpot win probability in the success / failure determination process performed when the start trigger is different from being different.

  In the hold information targeted for the determination process whether or not to add the number of rounds, not only the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is cleared to “0”, but the hold information not corresponding to the jackpot win is also “0 'Cleared. Here, if it is configured to clear only the hold information corresponding to the big hit in the hold information which is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds, it is determined whether to add the number of rounds. The player is identified as the out-of-order result of the hold information not cleared “0” among the hold information targeted for processing. In this case, it is necessary to digest the game times that have specified that the success or failure results are out of order. In that respect, according to the present configuration, regardless of the result of the pending information subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds, the pending process that is subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds All information is cleared to "0". As a result, it is specified to the player that the hold result of the hold information which is not cleared “0” in the hold information which is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is out of order. It becomes possible to prevent that it is necessary to digest the game times that have specified that the success or failure result is the out-of-order result.

  In the hold information acquired before the end of the game corresponding to the jackpot winning, the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is set. Here, assuming that the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is set from among the hold information acquired until the game round corresponding to the big hit is started, The hold information acquired after the game run corresponding to the jackpot win is started is not the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. In this case, it is not possible for the player to continue the firing operation from the start to the end of the game run corresponding to the jackpot win. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the suspension information to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds from the suspension information acquired until the end of the game corresponding to the jackpot win is set. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to perform the firing operation continuously even while the game round corresponding to the big hit is performed.

  The variation display time of the game times corresponding to the non-reach occurrence is the first start hold ball number NA and the second start until the number of the first start hold ball number NA and the number of the second start hold ball number NB becomes a predetermined number. The number of holding ball number NB is set to be short each time it reaches a specific number, and the number of the first starting holding ball number NA and the number of the second starting holding ball number NB become more than the predetermined number. It is set to a short variation display time. The predetermined number is set to a number that is difficult to reach even if the firing operation is continued for a long period of time. Specifically, the specific number is set to 20, 40, 60 and 80, and the predetermined number is set to 100. The variation display time does not change until the next specific number or predetermined number is reached. Therefore, in this embodiment, the numbers of the first starting holding ball number NA and the second starting holding ball number NB are “1 to 19”, “20 to 39”, “40 to 59”, “ The fluctuation display time is set to be shorter in the order of 60 to 79, "80 to 99", and "100 or more". According to this configuration, it is possible to specify the approximate number of the first starting hold ball number NA and the number of the second start holding ball number NB from the variation display time of the game times corresponding to the non-reach occurrence. Further, when the number of the first starting ball holding number NA and the number of the second starting ball holding number NB become equal to or more than a predetermined number, the shortest variation display time is set thereafter. The predetermined number is set to a number that is difficult to reach even if the firing operation is continued for a long period of time. Here, if the variable display time is shortened even after the number of the first starting ball holding number NA and the second starting ball holding number NB exceeds the predetermined number, it is actually set. It is necessary to store almost no variation display time in the non-reach variation display time table of the ROM 63. In that respect, according to the present configuration, when the number of the first starting holding ball number NA and the number of the second starting holding ball number NB become equal to or more than the predetermined number, the shortest variation display time is set thereafter. It is not necessary to store the variation display time which is hardly set in the table in the non-reach variation generation display time table of the ROM 63. Thus, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the ROM 63 of the main control device 60 from being unnecessarily increased.

  In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode and the hold information that triggered the start of the current game run is the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb, reach does not occur in the game run and The variation display time set when the second start pending ball number NB is “0” is the variation set when the reach non-occurrence and the second start pending ball number NB is larger than “0” in the above situation It is set to be longer than the display time and shorter than the variable display time set when reach is generated in the above situation. According to this configuration, the variable display time set when reach does not occur in the above situation and the second start pending ball count NB is “0” is in the above situation with no reach and the second start pending sphere number NB Since it is set to be longer than the variable display time set when the value is more than "0", when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the game triggered by the winning of the upper operation opening 23 It is possible to increase the probability that holding information is stored in the second holding area Rb before the times are started. This makes it possible to lower the probability of occurrence of a game run triggered by a winning on the upper operation opening 23 in the high frequency support mode situation. Furthermore, according to this configuration, the variable display time set when reach does not occur in the above situation and the second start pending ball number NB is “0” is set when reach is occurring in the above situation It is set to be shorter than the variable display time. As described above, if reach is generated, there is a possibility that jackpot will be won, but you can expect to win jackpot but if it is not reach, jackpot will not be won, so you can expect jackpot winning Absent. Here, the variable display time set when reach does not occur in the above situation and the second starting suspension ball number NB is “0” is longer than the variable display time set when reach is occurring in the above situation If it is a long composition, although it does not become a jackpot winning, it feels frustrating that the time required for the effect to end is long. In that respect, according to this configuration, the variable display time set when reach does not occur in the above situation and the second starting suspension ball number NB is “0” is set when reach is occurring in the above situation Since it is set to be shorter than the variable display time, it is possible to prevent long-term effects that can not be expected from winning a big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling frustrated with the occurrence of effects that can not be expected in the jackpot win for a long time.

  Up to 255 pieces of hold information can be stored in each of the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb. Here, if it is configured that the number that can be reserved and stored in the first storage area Ra and the second storage area Rb can be easily reached, the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 Although there is a prize winning, there is a possibility that the frequency of occurrence of a situation where it is not possible to store the holding information in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb may be high. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the number of holdable storages is set to 255 in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb, so the hold information can be stored up to the holdable number. There is a low possibility of acquisition. As a result, when a winning on the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24 occurs, a situation occurs in which holding information can not be stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb. It is possible to reduce the frequency.

Second Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for determining whether to add the number of rounds. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<Playing state transition processing>
The gaming state transition processing executed in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the second embodiment.

  First, the process of steps S1601 to S1607 is the same as the process of steps S901 to S907. If a negative determination is made in step S1604, a jackpot winning number identification process is executed in step S1608. The jackpot winning number identification process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot winning number identification process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, the processes of steps S1701 to S1705 are the same as the processes of steps S1001 to S1005. When the process of step S1703 is executed, or when the process of step S1705 is executed, the first big hit number counter and the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1706 are "0". It is determined whether or not. The first big hit number counter is the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first hold area Ra, which is the target of the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a counter for specifying how much the pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the. Further, the second big hit number counter is stored in the hold areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second hold area Rb to be subjected to the process of determining whether the number of rounds is to be added by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a counter for specifying how much the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot is included in the suspension information. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, the jackpot winning number identification process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1706, it is determined in step S1707 whether the first big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than “0”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1707, the first addition lottery table is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 in step S1708. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1707, the second addition lottery table is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 in step S1709.

  The first addition lottery table and the second addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The first addition lottery table and the second addition lottery table are set in such a manner that the result of being added or not added and the numerical range of the drawing counter correspond to each other on a one-to-one basis. The lottery counter is a counter used to specify the lottery result whether or not to add the number of rounds, and for example, is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value, “0 It is configured to return to FIG. 26 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining a first addition lottery table, and FIG. 26 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a second addition lottery table.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the case of the first addition lottery table, when the first big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "1," the probability of winning being added is set to 50%. When the first big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "2," the probability of winning being added is set to 60% and provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. When the first big hit number counter is “3”, the probability of winning being added is set to 80%, and when the first big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64 is “4” or more, it is added The probability of winning is set to 90%.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (b), in the case of the second addition lottery table, when the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "1," the probability of winning being added is set to 70%. When the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "2", the probability of winning being added is set to 80%, and provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. When the second big hit number counter is “3”, the probability of winning being added is set to 90%, and when the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64 is “4” or more, The probability of winning is set at 99%.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery process of whether to add the number of rounds is performed with reference to the first addition lottery table or the second addition lottery table, and the round is selected in the lottery process. The numbers are added. According to the configuration, it is expected that the suspension information corresponding to the big hit will be included in the suspension information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds and whether the number of rounds is added It becomes possible to expect also to be added winning in the lottery process of whether or not.

  The number of rounds is added in the lottery process as to whether the number of rounds is to be added the larger the number of the held information to be a big hit is included in the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. The probability of winning is set to be high. Since it is assumed that the player is expecting the number of rounds to be added, it is assumed that the jackpot information in the hold information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds by using the configuration. A benefit can be given to a large number of pending information corresponding to a winning.

  In the first addition lottery table and the second addition lottery table, whether the number of rounds is to be added in the second addition lottery table rather than the first addition lottery table when comparing for each number of pending information that will be a big hit It is set so that the probability of winning an addition will be high in the lottery process of whether or not. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage that the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  The probability of winning an addition is not set to 100%. In this embodiment, although the details will be described later, a lottery process is performed to determine whether to add the number of rounds, and if it is determined that the addition is won in the lottery process, it is determined whether to add the number of rounds. The target hold information is cleared to "0". Here, it is conceivable that among the players, there are also players who want to see the effects displayed on the display screen G in the game round corresponding to the big hit. In this case, if the probability that the additional winning will be made is set to 100%, the number of times to see the effect displayed on the display screen G in the game round corresponding to the big hit will decrease. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the probability of winning an addition is not set to 100%, so the number of times the hold information corresponding to the big hit is cleared to "0" is reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of times the effect displayed on the display screen G is generated in the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning being reduced too much.

  Here, the probability that the addition winnings in the first big hit number counter and the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are not limited to the above probability, but the same addition In the lottery table, as the values of the first big hit number counter and the second big hit number counter become larger, the addition winning probability becomes higher, and the first added lottery table and the second added lottery table are compared, The second addition lottery table is optional as long as the probability of being added and winning is higher in the same big hit number than the first addition lottery table.

  Returning to the explanation of the jackpot winning number identification process (FIG. 25), when the process of step S1708 is executed or when the process of step S1709 is executed, the lottery process is executed in step S1710. Specifically, the value of the lottery counter periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) is read out in the RAM 64, and the value of the lottery counter is collated with any added lottery table read into the RAM 64. .

  If the addition winning is made (step S1711: YES), "1" is set to the addition winning flag of the RAM 64 in step S1712, and the present jackpot winning number specifying process is ended. The addition winning flag is a flag for specifying that the addition win has been made in the lottery process of whether or not the number of rounds is to be added by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1711, if the "hold within normal big hit flag" or the "hold inside probability change big hit" flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S1713, the "1" flag is set. Clear the "0" and end the jackpot winning number identification process. The in-hold normal big hit flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 refers to the yes / no table for the low probability mode to perform the yes / no determination process, and the in-hold probable variation big hit flag Is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 refers to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode to perform the hit / not determination process.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 24), when the process of step S1608 is executed, it is determined in step S1609 whether "1" is set in the addition win flag of the RAM 64 or not.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the processing of step S1610 to step S1612 is executed. The process of the said step S1610-step S1612 is the same as the process of step S1605-step S1607.

  In the present embodiment, the addition win flag of the RAM 64 is “1” even if the hold information corresponding to the big hit is present in the hold information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. If it is not set, the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is not cleared to “0”. As a result, even if the number of holding information does not decrease when the jackpot is won, it is possible to expect that the holding information includes the holding information to be the jackpot winning.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1609, special round number setting processing is executed in step S1613. In the special round number setting process, the first jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than "0" and the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 6R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". If YES, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is multiplied by six, and the value obtained by adding "6" to the value is set. The jackpot winning number is a value set in the first jackpot number counter.

  Also, when the first big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than “0” and the 6R normal big hit flag or the 6R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, various kinds of RAM 64 The round counter RC provided in the counter area 64b is multiplied by six, and the value obtained by adding "16" to the value is set. The jackpot winning number is a value set in the first jackpot number counter.

  Also, when the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than “0” and the 6R normal big hit flag or the 6R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, various kinds of RAM 64 The round counter RC provided in the counter area 64b is multiplied by 16 and the value obtained by adding "6" to the value. The jackpot winning number is a value set in the second jackpot number counter.

  Also, the number of big wins is multiplied by 16 in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 and the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than "0". Set the value to which "16" is added. The jackpot winning number is a value set in the second jackpot number counter.

  When a value is set to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, "1000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 and in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The first jackpot number counter or second jackpot number counter provided is cleared to "0".

  In the following step S1614, a pending information handling process is executed. In the pending information handling process, a process for clearing “0” the pending information subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is performed. Specifically, when the hold information subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra, the first start hold ball number NA is set. While clearing “0”, the first holding area Ra is cleared “0”. On the other hand, when the hold information subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb, first, the first start hold ball number NB is “1 Set ". Next, “0” clears pending areas Rb1 to Rb254 other than the pending areas Rb2 to Rb255 higher than the pending areas Rb to Rb 254 corresponding to the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 At the same time, the hold information which has not become the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds in the second holding area Rb is shifted to the first holding area Rb1 of the second holding area Rb.

  When the process of step S1606 is executed, the process of step S1607 is executed, the process of step S1611 is executed, the process of step S1612 is executed, or the process of step S1614 is executed, the process of step S1615 Run. The process of step S1615 is the same as the process of step S912.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the processing of step S1616 to step S1619 is executed. The process of the said step S1616-step S1619 is the same as the process of step S913-step S916.

  When the process of step S1619 is executed, the various flags are cleared to "0" in step S1620, and the game state transition process is ended. Specifically, "1" is set among the 6R normal big hit flag, 6R positive variation big hit flag, 16R normal big hit flag, 16R positive variation big hit flag, in-hold normal big hit flag, in-hold probable change big hit flag, and addition winning flag Clears the flag that is on.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the lottery process of whether to add the number of rounds is performed with reference to the first addition lottery table or the second addition lottery table, and if the addition is won in the lottery process, the round is selected. The numbers are added. According to the configuration, it is expected that the suspension information corresponding to the big hit will be included in the suspension information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds and whether the number of rounds is added It becomes possible to expect also to be added winning in the lottery process of whether or not.

  The number of rounds is added in the lottery process as to whether the number of rounds is to be added the larger the number of the held information to be a big hit is included in the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. The probability of winning is set to be high. Since it is assumed that the player is expecting the number of rounds to be added, it is assumed that the jackpot information in the hold information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds by using the configuration. A benefit can be given to a large number of pending information corresponding to a winning.

  In the first addition lottery table and the second addition lottery table, whether the number of rounds is to be added in the second addition lottery table rather than the first addition lottery table when comparing for each number of pending information that will be a big hit It is set so that the probability of winning an addition will be high in the lottery process of whether or not. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage that the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  The probability of winning an addition is not set to 100%. Further, in the present embodiment, a lottery process is performed to determine whether the number of rounds is to be added or not, and if addition win is made in the lottery process, the hold information as the target of the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds Is cleared to "0". Here, it is conceivable that among the players, there are also players who want to see the effects displayed on the display screen G in the game round corresponding to the big hit. In this case, if the probability that the additional winning will be made is set to 100%, the number of times to see the effect displayed on the display screen G in the game round corresponding to the big hit will decrease. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the probability of winning an addition is not set to 100%, so the number of times the hold information corresponding to the big hit is cleared to "0" is reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of times the effect displayed on the display screen G is generated in the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning being reduced too much.

  Even if the hold information corresponding to the big hit is present in the hold information targeted for the determination process whether to add the number of rounds, "1" is not set in the addition win flag of the RAM 64 The hold information targeted for the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the number of holding information does not decrease when the jackpot is won, it is possible to expect that the holding information includes the holding information to be the jackpot winning.

Another Example of Second Embodiment
(1) A lottery for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds in a situation where the pending information corresponding to the big hit is included in the pending information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds If the addition is not won in the process, it may be likely to be added in the next lottery process, or may be always added. If it is determined in the lottery process that determines whether or not the number of rounds is to be added continuously, the player may feel annoyed about that when it is determined that the addition is not successful. In that respect, in the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds by adopting this configuration, it is difficult to continuously generate or not to continuously become an addition non-election. It is possible to block. As a result, it is possible to prevent accumulation of frustration for not being added in the lottery process for determining whether to add the number of rounds.

  (2) When a plurality of pieces of suspension information corresponding to a big hit are included in the suspension information targeted for the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds, with the jackpot result in the pass / fail determination process of the suspension information. A lottery process may be executed to determine whether or not to add the number of rounds each time it becomes. Further, in this case, in the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, the probability that the addition process will be won in the lottery process may be higher as the number of times the addition non-wining occurs successively. . According to the configuration, the number of rounds is not added in a situation where the number of the held information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the held information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds or not. It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the situation.

  (3) In the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, the probability of being added is dependent on the number of hold information acquired at the stage when the game round corresponding to the big hit is started It is good also as composition. Specifically, the larger the number of the hold information acquired at the stage when the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is started, the higher the probability that the lottery process will be an addition win may be made.

  As the number of times of game times digested after the opening / closing execution mode is increased, the probability of being added to winning may be increased in the lottery process for determining whether to add the number of rounds. According to the configuration, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game even in a situation where the number of times of game times digested is large after the open / close execution mode ends.

  (4) Withholding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds and areas for holding Ra and Rb to be subjected to lottery processing to determine whether to add the number of rounds May be configured differently. According to the configuration, it is possible to make the user think that he / she wants to store the hold information in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb instead of one of the holding areas Ra and Rb. Become.

  (5) The winning determination process may be performed at the timing when the hold information is acquired, and if the jackpot is won in the determination process, a lottery process may be performed to determine whether to add the number of rounds. In the configuration, an effect corresponding to whether or not the number of rounds is added may be displayed on the display screen G until a game play corresponding to a big hit is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the round number is added. In addition, in the configuration, when it is determined that the addition is won in the lottery process for determining whether to add the number of rounds, the big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by 1, and the big hit number counter The number of rounds corresponding to the value of is set to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64.

  (6) In the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, when the addition is not won, the fluctuation display time of the suspension information to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds becomes short. The configuration may be easy. According to the configuration, even if the addition is not won in the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, the jackpot in the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds It is possible to impart a benefit to the inclusion of the hold information corresponding to the winning.

  (7) A lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds when the value of the first jackpot number counter provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 or the value of the second jackpot number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The probability that the additional winning will be made may be set to 100%.

  (8) The addition winning probability is set to be the same in the first addition lottery table and the second addition lottery table, and the second addition lottery table is one addition winning probability than the first addition lottery table. It may be configured to be set so that the number of the hold information that will be the jackpot winning corresponding to. Specifically, when the first big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "1" or the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "3", the addition win is made. When the probability is set to 50% and the first jackpot number counter is "2" or the second jackpot number counter is "4", the added winning probability is set to 60%, and the first jackpot probability is set to 60%. When the jackpot number counter is “3” or the second jackpot number counter is “5”, the added winning probability is set to 70%, and the first jackpot number counter is “4” or more, or the second When the jackpot number counter is “6” or more, the addition winning probability may be set to 90%. Here, when the second addition lottery table is referred to, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds are the second holding area Rb, and the winning lottery is performed. The mode is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the frequency at which winning in the lower operating port 24 occurs, and in the low frequency support mode (status in which the first addition lottery table is referred to), the winning in the upper operating port 23 is In comparison with the frequency of occurrence, the former has a higher frequency of occurrence than the latter. Therefore, in the high probability mode, the second addition lottery table is set such that the number of pieces of hold information which will be jackpot winning corresponding to one additional winning probability is larger than that of the first addition lottery table. It is possible to prevent the frequency of adding the number of rounds from becoming too high compared to the case where the mode is the low probability mode.

Third Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the number of pieces of reserve information that can be digested at one time. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<Simultaneous digestion button 120>
In the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously digest the hold information stored in any one of the holding areas Ra and Rb among the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb. The simultaneous digestion means that the pass / fail judgment processing is performed with a plurality of hold information in one game time, and the plurality of hold information subjected to the pass / fail judgment processing is erased. An apparatus for performing the above-mentioned simultaneous digestion will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the upper bulging portion 56 is provided with a simultaneous digestion button 120. The simultaneous digest button 120 is operated when simultaneously digesting the hold information stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb.

  On the input side of the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, a simultaneous detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the operation of the simultaneous digestion button 120 is connected. When the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated, the simultaneous detection sensor outputs an HI level signal to the MPU 62. When the simultaneous digestion button 120 is not operated, the simultaneous detection sensor outputs the LOW level signal to the MPU 62. Output. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to output a LOW level signal when the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated and output a HI level signal when the simultaneous digestion button 120 is not operated. Alternatively, the electric signal may be output only when the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated.

  According to the present embodiment, by operating the simultaneous digest button 120, the holding information stored in any one of the holding areas Ra and Rb of the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is displayed. It is possible to digest simultaneously. As a result, even a player whose gaming time is limited can play with peace of mind.

<Execution area AE>
Next, the execution area AE in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram for describing the execution area AE.

As shown in FIG. 28, the execution area AE is provided with the first holding correspondence area AE1 to the 255th holding correspondence area AE255, and starts variable display of the upper operation opening display section 33 or the lower operation opening display section 34. When moving the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first hold area Ra or the hold information stored in the hold areas Rb1 to Rb255 of the second hold area Rb, On the basis of the hold information stored in the execution area AE, a decision on whether to accept or not is made.

  The hold information stored in the n-th hold area of the hold areas Ra and Rb is stored in the n-th hold correspondence area of the execution area AE. If the number of pending reservations is one, the pending information stored in the first pending area Ra1 is moved to the first pending area AE1. In the case of simultaneously detaining the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb, the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first hold area Ra or the hold areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second hold area Rb correspond to the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255. The hold information is moved to the hold corresponding areas AE1 to AE255. As a result, even if a plurality of suspension information stored in the suspension areas Ra and Rb are simultaneously shifted to the execution area AE, it is mainly determined which suspension areas Ra1 to Ra255 and Rb1 to Rb 254 correspond to the suspension information. It becomes possible to specify by the MPU 62 of the control device 60.

<Game times control processing>
The game play control process executed in step S403 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the game play control process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, the process of step S1801-step S1803 is the same as the process of step S501-step S503. If a negative determination is made in step S1803, it is determined in step S1804 whether the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1". The simultaneous digestion flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 digests a plurality of pieces of suspension information at one time in one game cycle.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the first data setting process is executed in step S1805, and the first change start process is executed in subsequent step S1806. The first data setting process is the same process as the data setting process performed in step S504, and the first fluctuation start process is the same process as the fluctuation start process performed in step S505.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, simultaneous digestion processing is executed in step S1807. The simultaneous digestion process will be described with reference to FIG. The simultaneous digesting process is a process performed when digesting a plurality of suspension information at one time in one game time. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the simultaneous digestion process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, at step S1901, the value stored in the second holding number storage area NB of the second holding area Rb is read out, and the second start holding ball number NB stored in the second holding area Rb is "2 It is determined whether it is larger than "." Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the simultaneous digestion are different according to the number of holding information stored in the respective holding areas Ra and Rb. By providing the process of step S1901, the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 can specify the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to simultaneous digestion.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1901, in step S1902, the number to be simultaneously digested is set in the simultaneously digested number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The said simultaneous digestion number counter is a counter for specifying the number to be simultaneously digested by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. In step S1902, specifically, the value of the first starting hold ball number NA is set in the simultaneously digested number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  In the following step S1903, the first starting ball holding number NA is cleared to "0". In the following step S1904, all data in the first holding area Ra is transferred to the execution area AE. As described above, the execution area AE includes 255 pending areas AE1 to AE255. The respective holding areas AE1 to AE255 correspond to the respective holding areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first holding area Ra and the respective holding areas Rb1 to Rb255 of the second holding area Rb. In step S1904, specifically, the value of the simultaneously digested number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped, and the value of the simultaneously digested number counter is added to the pending areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first pending area Ra. The stored hold information is transferred to the corresponding hold corresponding areas AE1 to AE255 in the execution area AE. In detail, for example, in the situation where the reserve information stored in the first reserve area Ra is simultaneously digested, when the simultaneous digested number counter is “2”, the information is stored in the first reserve area Ra1 of the first reserve area Ra. The transferred hold information is transferred to the first held area AE1 of the execution area AE, and the held information stored in the second held area Ra2 of the first held area Ra is transferred to the second held area AE2 of the execution area AE Do.

  In the subsequent step S1905, the first holding area Ra is cleared to "0". By the processing, the number of pieces of suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra becomes “0”.

  In step S1906, a pending information deletion command is set. The hold information deletion command is a command for specifying the timing at which the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 cancels the display of the number displayed in the first hold number display area Ga. The hold information deletion command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The audio light emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned pending information deletion command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  Here, the processing of the display control device 100 corresponding to the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command handling processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives the hold information deletion command from the sound emission control device 90 (step S2001: YES), the first stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2002. Clear “0” to the display storage reserve number laN1.

  In the subsequent step S2003, information for stopping the display of the first hold count display area Ga is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, a number corresponding to the number of pieces of suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra in the first suspension number display area Ga is not displayed.

  Returning to the explanation of the simultaneous digestion process (FIG. 30), when an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, “1” is set in the lower operation opening opportunity flag of the RAM 64 in step S1907. The lower operation opening opportunity flag is a flag for specifying that the game run has been started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the lower operation opening 24.

  In step S1908, the number to be simultaneously digested is set in the simultaneously digested number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. Specifically, a value obtained by performing the second starting pending ball number NB-1 is set in the simultaneously digested number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  At step S1909, "1" is set in the second starting ball storage number NB. In the following step S1910, target data in the second holding area Rb is transferred to the execution area AE. Specifically, the value of the simultaneously digested number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped, and the value of the simultaneously digested number counter is stored in the pending areas Rb1 to Rb 254 of the second pending area Rb. The suspension information is transferred to the corresponding suspension areas AE1 to AE254 in the execution area AE. In detail, for example, in the situation where the pending information stored in the second pending area Rb is simultaneously digested (the situation where the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”), In the case of “2”, the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb is transferred to the first hold corresponding area AE1 of the execution area AE, and the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb Are transferred to the second hold correspondence area AE2 of the execution area AE.

  In the following step S1911, the data in the second holding area Rb is shifted. Specifically, in a situation where the reserve information stored in the second reserve area Rb is simultaneously digested, the reserve areas Rb1 to Rb 254 corresponding to the value of the simultaneously digested number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 The reserve areas Rb1 to Rb 254 other than the upper reserve areas Rb2 to Rb 255 are cleared to “0”, and the reserve information not subject to simultaneous digestion is shifted to the first reserve area Rb1 of the second reserve area Rb.

  According to the present embodiment, when the second starting holding ball number NB is larger than "2", one holding information is left among the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb, and the other holding is performed. Information is simultaneously digested. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb becomes the target of the game run after the opening / closing execution mode at the time of simultaneously digesting the hold information ends.

  In the subsequent step S1912, a special shift command is set. The special shift command is a command for specifying the timing at which the number displayed in the second hold count display area Gb is “1” in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. The special shift command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 transmits the special shift command as it is to the display control device 100.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the display control device 100 receives the special shift command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2004: YES), the second stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2005. Set “1” to the display side reserve storage number lbN1.

  In the subsequent step S2006, information for setting the display of the second hold count display area Gb to "1" is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, “1” is displayed in the second hold count display area Gb in correspondence with the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb.

  Returning to the description of the simultaneous digestion process (FIG. 30), when the process of step S1906 is executed or when the process of step S1912 is executed, the simultaneous variation start process is executed in step S1913. The simultaneous change start process will be described with reference to FIG. The simultaneous change start process is a process for starting the variable display when simultaneously carrying out the reserve information. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the simultaneous change start process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, at step S 2101, one is added to the execution determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64. The determination processing number counter for execution specifies the suspension corresponding areas AE1 to AE255 of the execution area AE in which the acceptance determination process is performed with the suspension information in a situation where the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 simultaneously digests the suspension information. Is a counter for The initial value of the execution determination process number counter is set to “0”.

  In step S2102, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the value of the execution determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped. In the present embodiment, the value of the execution determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 corresponds to the suspension corresponding areas AE1 to AE255 of the execution area AE. Specifically, when the execution determination processing number counter is “1”, execution is performed when the first suspension handling area AE1 of the execution area AE corresponds and the execution determination processing number counter is “255”. The 255th reservation corresponding area AE 255 of the area AE corresponds. In step S2102, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the suspension corresponding areas AE1 to AE255 of the execution area AE corresponding to the value of the execution determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is specifically grasped Do.

  In the following step S2103, it is determined whether "1" is set in the 6R probability variation big hit flag, the 16R probability variation big hit flag or the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2103, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S2101 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win with reference to the yes or no table for the low probability mode in step S2104. judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S2101 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win with reference to the success or failure table for the high probability mode in step S2105. judge.

  When a big hit is won in the process of step S2104 or the process of step S2105 (step S2106: YES), the first simultaneous jackpot number counter or the second simultaneous jackpot number provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2107 Add 1 to the counter. The first simultaneous jackpot number counter is the number of jackpot winning information included when the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 simultaneously digests the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Is a counter for identifying The second simultaneous jackpot number counter is the number of the jackpot winning information included when the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 simultaneously digests the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb. Is a counter for identifying In step S2107, specifically, when "1" is not set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the first simultaneous big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by "1". When the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the second simultaneous big hit counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by "1".

  In step S2108, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the suspension corresponding areas AE1 to AE255 of the execution area AE corresponding to the value of the execution determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped.

  Then, when "1" is not set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the jackpot type counter grasped above is referred to with reference to the upper operation opening distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. The value of C2 specifies which of the 6R normal jackpot result and the 6R probability variation jackpot result corresponds to which jackpot result. On the other hand, when “1” is set to the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the jackpot type counter grasped as described above is referred to with reference to the lower operation opening distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. The value of C2 specifies which of the 16R normal jackpot result and the 16R probability variation jackpot result corresponds to which jackpot result.

  When the 6R probability variation big hit result or the 16R probability variation big result is obtained in the process of step S2108 (step S2109: YES), the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S2110. Determine if

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2110, in step S2111, the flag in which “1” is set is cleared from the 6R normal jackpot flag and the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 to “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2110, it is determined in step S2112 whether "1" is set in the 6R probability variation big hit flag or the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 or not. If the process of step S2111 is executed, or if the negative determination is made in step S2112, the process of the type determination process performed in step S2108 among the 6R probability variation big hit flag and the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 in step S2113 Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the result.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2109, it is determined in step S2114 whether the 6R positive variation big hit flag or the 16R positive variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". When an affirmative determination is made in step S2114, in step S2115, of the 6R probability variation big hit flag and the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64, the flag for which “1” is set is cleared to “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2114, it is determined in step S2116 whether the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". If the process of step S2115 is executed, or if the negative determination is made in step S2116, the process of the type determination process performed in step S2108 among the 6R normal big hit flag and the 16R normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 in step S2117 Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the result.

  If the negative determination is made in step S2106, the positive determination is made in step S2112, the processing in step S2113 is executed, the positive determination is made in step S2116, or if the processing in step S2117 is performed, the processing in step S2118 It is determined whether the value of the determination processing number counter for execution provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is the same as the value of the simultaneously digested number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. If a negative determination is made in step S2118, the processes of steps S2101 to S2117 are performed again.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2118, a simultaneous digestion determination post-processing is executed in step S2119. The simultaneous digestion determination post-processing will be described with reference to FIG. The said simultaneous digestion determination post-processing is performed in order to set the time until a stop result and a yes-no result are displayed, after reserve information is digested simultaneously. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the simultaneous digestion determination post-process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether "1" is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag, or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, stop result setting processing for the jackpot result is executed in step S2202. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, a mode of a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the upper operation opening display section 33 in the game round related to the start of fluctuation this time. Is identified from the stop result table for the first jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and the identified information is stored in the RAM 64. In the stop result table for the first jackpot result, the type of pattern to be stopped and displayed on the upper operation port display unit 33 is set differently for each type of jackpot result, and is specified in step S2202 The information of the pattern aspect according to the type of the big hit result is stored in the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, information of a pattern to be finally displayed on the lower operation opening display unit 34 in the game turn related to the start of fluctuation this time , And from the stop result table for the second jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and stores the specified information in the RAM 64. In the stop result table for the second jackpot result, the type of pattern to be stopped and displayed on the lower operation opening display unit 34 is set differently for each jackpot result type, and is specified in step S2202 The information of the pattern aspect according to the type of the big hit result is stored in the RAM 64.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2201, stop result setting processing for the removal result is executed in step S2203. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the embodiment of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the upper operation opening display section 33 in the game round related to the start of fluctuation this time The information is specified from the stop result table for outliers stored in advance in the ROM 63, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. On the other hand, when “1” is set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the ROM 63 displays information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the lower operation opening display unit 34 in the game round related to the start of fluctuation this time. Are specified from the stop result table for outliers stored in advance, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64.

  When the process of step S2202 is performed, or when the process of step S2203 is performed, a setting process of the result display time of the success or failure is performed in step S2204. Specifically, a value corresponding to the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set. The value set in the variable display time counter is set to one type. Specifically, "2500" is set to the fluctuation display time counter. In the case of simultaneous digestion, the value set in the above-mentioned variable display time counter is not set in the case of digesting one piece of suspension information.

  In the following step S2205, the variation command and type command are set. The variable command includes information on the variable display time. As described above, since the value set in the variable display time counter in the case of simultaneous digestion is not set in the case of digesting one piece of suspension information, the voice emission control device 90 generates the variable display time It is possible to specify whether or not the pending information has been simultaneously digested from the information of. In the case where the classification command includes the suspension information that is a big hit among the suspension information that has been digested at the same time, if the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode Includes information for transitioning to the high probability mode, and information for transitioning the acceptance lottery mode to the low probability mode is included when the success or failure lottery mode transitions to the low probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

  The fluctuation command and the type command set in step S2205 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 determines, based on the received variation command and type command, whether the success or failure lottery mode is one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

  When the success or failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the open / close execution mode is ended (when the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”), on one valid line L1 to L5 The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same even symbols is established is determined as the information of the present stop result. In this case, the types of even symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In addition, when the success or failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends (when the 1R is set in the 6R probability variation big hit flag or the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64), one valid line L1 to L5 The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same odd symbol is established above is determined as the information of the present stop result. In this case, the types of odd symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In addition, when all the pass / fail results of the reserve information that has been simultaneously digested are out results, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is not displayed stop on one of the valid lines L1 to L5 is information of the current stop result Decide as. In this case, the types of symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In the present embodiment, when the suspension information is simultaneously digested, no advance notice effect or reach effect is generated, so that the process of determining the advance notice effect or the reach effect is not performed.

  Next, based on the received command for variation and type command, an effect pattern of game times related to the start of variation is determined. In this case, the content of the effect is selected by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 of the sound emission control device 90. The content of the effect is specifically described.

  Regardless of the success or failure result of the reserve information which has been simultaneously digested, when the game times corresponding to the simultaneous digestion are started, the variable display of symbols is started on the display screen G. When the success or failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, “lucky” is displayed on the display screen G at the timing when the same even symbol is stopped and displayed on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. Be done. In addition, when the success or failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, “Super Lucky” on the display screen G at the timing when the same odd symbol is stopped and displayed on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. Is displayed. If you refer to the high probability mode pass / fail table in the pass / fail judgment process, it is easier to win a big hit than referring to the low probability mode pass / fail table in the pass / fail judgment process. In the high probability mode, “Super Lucky”, which is more fortunate than “Lucky”, is displayed on the display screen G.

  In addition, when all the pass / fail results of the reserve information simultaneously digested are out of place results, "sorry" is displayed on the display screen G at the timing when the non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. Be done.

  The MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the game round related to the start of fluctuation and the output control of the speaker unit 55 according to the determined effect pattern.

  Next, the display control device 100 is sent a stop result command corresponding to the stop result and a pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the game round related to the start of fluctuation.

  Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for causing the symbol display device 31 to provide the effects of the game cycle related to the start of fluctuation. The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 each time the image update timing predetermined in accordance with the table is reached (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). As a result, in the symbol display device 31, according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, effects for the game circulation are executed, and the stop result determined by the MPU 92 is finally displayed as a stop Be done.

  In the present embodiment, when the reserve information is simultaneously digested, not all the suspension results in the simultaneously digested suspension information are displayed, but only one suspension result is displayed. Specifically, when the reserve information is simultaneously digested, when the success or failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the low probability mode, the stop result that the same even symbol combination is established on the activated lines L1 to L5 Is displayed, and when the reserve information is simultaneously digested, the stop result that the combination of the same odd symbols is established on the activated lines L1 to L5 when the success or failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode If all the pass / fail results of the displayed and simultaneously digested holding information are out results, a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stop displayed is displayed on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. As a result, in the situation where the hold information is simultaneously digested, it is possible to easily inform the player of the type of the lottery mode in the success or failure after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  After the variation display of the pattern is started on the display portions 33 and 34 in the subsequent step S2206, the present variation start processing is ended. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the variation display of the pattern is started on the upper operation opening display section 33, and “1” is set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64. When “is set, the variation display of the pattern is started on the lower operation opening display section 34.

  Returning to the description of the simultaneous change start process (FIG. 32), after the process of step S2119 is executed, the number-of-executions determination processing number counter provided in various counter areas 64b of RAM 64 in step S2120 and various counter areas 64b of RAM 64 The simultaneous digestion number counter provided in is cleared to "0", and the simultaneous fluctuation start process is ended.

  Returning to the explanation of the game play control process (FIG. 29), after executing the process of step S1807, the simultaneous digestion flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1808. Since the simultaneous digestion flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to “0” in the processing, the simultaneous digestion flag of the RAM 64 is “1” when the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated even in a situation where the pending information is simultaneously digested. It becomes possible to set.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not a variation display time of the game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64 is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1809, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the simultaneous digest button 120 has been operated. The simultaneous digest button 120 is a button operated to simultaneously digest the hold information stored in any one of the holding areas Ra and Rb of the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb. is there. Specifically, in the process, it is determined whether the signal received from the simultaneous detection sensor (not shown) has switched from the LOW level signal to the HI level signal.

If a positive determination is made in step S1810, then the first starting ball holding number NA is greater than "1" and the second starting ball holding number NB is "0" or the second starting ball holding number NB is "in step S1811. It is determined whether it is larger than 2 ". In the present embodiment, a situation in which the first starting ball holding number NA is larger than “1” and the second starting ball holding number NB is “0”, or the second starting ball holding number NB is larger than “2”. Only in circumstances can the pending information be simultaneously digested. In the present embodiment, when the first starting holding ball number NA is larger than “1” and the second starting holding ball number NB is “1 to 2”, the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra Can not be digested simultaneously. Here, as in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is digested earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. It is a structure. In the configuration concerned, the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra in a situation where the first starting holding ball number NA is larger than “1” and the second starting holding ball number NB is “1 to 2” Can be simultaneously consumed, the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is first digested in a situation where the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb. In that respect, according to the present configuration, when the first starting holding ball number NA is larger than “1” and the second starting holding ball number NB is “1 to 2”, the first holding area Ra is stored. Because it is not possible to simultaneously digest pending information
In a situation where the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb, the reserve information may be simultaneously digested while preventing the hold information stored in the first reserve area Ra from being digested first. It becomes possible.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S 1811, it is determined in step S 1812 whether “1” is set in the simultaneous digestion flag of the RAM 64. As described above, the simultaneous digest flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 digests a plurality of pieces of suspension information at once in one game cycle.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1812, the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S1813. In the following step S1814, it is determined whether the first starting ball holding number NA is larger than "1" and the second starting ball holding number NB is "0".

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1814, a first simultaneous digest command is set in step S1815. The first simultaneous digest command refers to simultaneous digest in the situation where the first start pending ball number NA is larger than “1” and the second start pending ball number NB is “0” in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. This is a command for specifying that the button 120 has been operated. The first simultaneous digest command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 transmits the first simultaneous digest command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the display control device 100 receives the first simultaneous digest command from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 (step S2007: YES), information to display the first simultaneous digest image in step S2008. To the VDP 105. Thereby, the first simultaneous digestion image is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, "Next variation may be simultaneously digested" is displayed in the upper part of the display screen G, and "lower winning opening in the lower operation opening 24" occurs in the lower part of the display screen G separately from the image. "Set at least 3 pieces of hold information corresponding to the winning on the mouth 24" is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the first starting ball holding number NA is larger than “1” and the second starting ball holding number NB is “1 to 2”, they are stored in the first holding area Ra Simultaneous digestion does not take place in the pending information being According to this configuration, when the first starting ball holding number NA is larger than "1" and the second starting ball holding number NB is "0", the lower action is performed in the situation where the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated. When a winning on the opening 24 occurs, it is possible to make the player specify that the holding information is not simultaneously digested unless the number of holding information corresponding to the winning on the lower operation opening 24 is three or more.

  Returning to the description of the game play control process (FIG. 29), if a negative determination is made in step S1814, a second simultaneous digest command is set in step S1816. The second simultaneous digest command is used to specify that the timing at which the simultaneous digest button 120 is operated in a situation where the second start-hold ball number NB is larger than “2” in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. Is the command of The second simultaneous digest command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 transmits the second simultaneous digest command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the display control device 100 receives the second simultaneous digest command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2009: YES), information to display the second simultaneous digest image in step S2010. To the VDP 105. Thereby, the second simultaneous digestion image is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, on the display screen G, an image "the next change is simultaneous digestion" is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player specify that the next change is necessarily simultaneously digested.

  Returning to the description of the game play control process (FIG. 29), if the determination is affirmative in step S1812, the simultaneous settlement flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1817. In the subsequent step S1818, a simultaneous digestion release command is set. The simultaneous digestion cancellation command is a command for specifying the timing at which the display of the first simultaneously digested image or the second simultaneously digested image displayed on the display screen G by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is stopped. . The simultaneous digestion release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice light emission control device 90 transmits the simultaneous digestion release command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the display control device 100 receives the above-mentioned simultaneous digestion release command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2011: YES), the display of the first or second simultaneously digested image in step S2012. Send information to the VDP 105 to stop the Thereby, the display of the first or second simultaneous digested image on the display screen G is stopped.

  According to the present embodiment, it is possible to change whether or not to simultaneously suspend the holding information, as long as the variable display time of the game time has elapsed. Here, if it is not possible to change whether or not the pending information is to be simultaneously digested, for example, if the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated erroneously, the pending information is simultaneously digested even if it is not desired to simultaneously digest the pending information. It will be done. In that respect, according to the present configuration, it is possible to change whether or not to simultaneously suspend the holding information, as long as the variation display time of the game times has elapsed. This makes it possible to digest hold information as desired by the player.

  Returning to the description of the game play control process (FIG. 29), if the determination in step S1810 is negative, the determination in step S1811 is negative, the process of step S1815 is executed, or the process of step S1816 is executed, or When the process of step S1818 is executed, a process for variable display is executed in step S1819. In the variable display process, when “1” is not set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64, the display mode in the upper operation opening display unit 33 is changed, and “1” is set in the lower operation opening trigger flag of the RAM 64. Is set, the display mode on the lower operation opening display unit 34 is changed.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1809, the processing of step S1820 to step S1823 is executed. The process of the said step S1820-step S1823 is the same as the process of step S508-step S511.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1822, or if the process of step S1823 is performed, the processes of step S1824 to step S1826 are performed. Here, in the situation where the first starting holding ball number NA is larger than “1” and the second starting holding ball number NB is “1 to 2” when the variable display ends, If “1” is set, simultaneous digestion is performed on the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. In the processes of steps S1824 to S1826, when the simultaneous digest flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1" in the above-mentioned situation, the simultaneous digest flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0".

  First, at step S1824, it is determined whether or not the first starting ball holding number NA is larger than "1" and the second starting ball holding number NB is "1-2". When a negative judging is carried out at Step S1824, this game times control processing is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1824, it is determined in step S1825 whether the simultaneous digestion flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". When a negative judging is carried out at Step S1825, this game times control processing is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1825, the simultaneous digest flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1826, and the game play control process is ended. According to the present configuration, in a situation where the first starting holding ball number NA is larger than “1” and the second starting holding ball number NB is “1 to 2”, the simultaneous digestion flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. Even if it has been, the simultaneous digestion flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" at the end of the variable display. This makes it possible to prevent simultaneous termination of the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in a situation where the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb.

<Playing state transition processing>
The gaming state transition process executed in the process of step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, the processing of step S2301 to step S2303 is the same as the processing of step S901 to step S903. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the first simultaneous jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than "0". As described above, the first simultaneous jackpot number counter includes the jackpot winning, which is included when the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 simultaneously digests the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra. Is a counter for identifying the number of pending information items.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2304, in step S2305, a value obtained by multiplying the number of jackpot wins by six is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The jackpot winning number is a value set in a first simultaneous jackpot number counter provided in various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64.

  In step S2305, "1000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 as a standby period for opening. In the following step S2306, the first simultaneous jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0".

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2304, a value obtained by multiplying the number of big wins by 16 is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2307. The big hit number is a value set in the second simultaneous big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64.

  In step S2307, "1000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 as a standby period for opening. In the following step S2308, the second simultaneous jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0".

  According to the present embodiment, in the situation in which the suspension information is simultaneously digested, if the suspension information which is simultaneously digested includes the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning, the number of the suspension information for which the jackpot is won Depending on the number of rounds will be added. In order to simultaneously digest the pending information, it is necessary to operate the simultaneous digestion button 120. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to operate the simultaneous digest button 120 positively.

  The round number is added by operating the simultaneous digest button 120 by the player in a situation where there are a plurality of hold information that is a big hit among the hold information. That is, in the above situation, the number of rounds is not added unless the simultaneous digest button 120 is operated by the player. Therefore, with this configuration, when the number of rounds is added, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

  If the process of step S2306 has been executed, or if the process of step S2308 has been executed, an opening command is set in step S2309, and the present gaming state transition process is ended. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes setting processing of effects for the open / close execution mode. The light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the open / close execution mode is performed according to the set effect pattern, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed.

  The sound emission control apparatus 90 transmits to the display control apparatus 100 an open / close execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the setting process of the effect for the open / close execution mode. In the display control device 100, based on the received command for opening / closing execution mode, a data table is read out from the program ROM 103 to be performed by the symbol display device 31 of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode this time. The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 each time the image update timing is reached (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  When an affirmation judging is carried out at Step S2301, processing of Step S2310-Step S2312 is the same as processing of Step S913-Step S915. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2312, transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S2313. Specifically, it is determined whether "1" is set to the 6R probability variation big hit flag, the 16R probability variation big hit flag, or the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64, and the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". If not, the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 are set to “1”. When the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", it is determined whether the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", and the high probability mode of the RAM 64 is determined. When the flag is set to “1”, the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 are cleared to “0”.

  When the process of step S2313 is executed, the various flags are cleared to "0" in step S2314, and the game state transition process is ended. Specifically, among the 6R normal jackpot flag, 6R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the flag in which “1” is set is cleared to “0”.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, by operating the simultaneous digest button 120, it is possible to simultaneously digest the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb. As a result, even a player whose gaming time is limited can play with peace of mind.

  If the second starting holding ball number NB is larger than "2", among the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb, one holding information is left and the other holding information is simultaneously digested. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb becomes the target of the game run after the opening / closing execution mode at the time of simultaneously digesting the hold information ends.

  When the reserve information is simultaneously digested, not all stop results of the simultaneously digested hold information are displayed, but only one stop result is displayed. Specifically, when the reserve information is simultaneously digested, when the success or failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the low probability mode, the stop result that the same even symbol combination is established on the activated lines L1 to L5 Is displayed, and when the reserve information is simultaneously digested, the stop result that the combination of the same odd symbols is established on the activated lines L1 to L5 when the success or failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode If all the pass / fail results of the displayed and simultaneously digested holding information are out results, a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stop displayed is displayed on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. As a result, in the situation where the hold information is simultaneously digested, it is possible to easily inform the player of the type of the lottery mode in the success or failure after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  It is possible to change whether or not the reserve information is simultaneously digested, as long as the variable display time of the game time has elapsed. Here, if it is not possible to change whether or not the pending information is to be simultaneously digested, for example, if the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated erroneously, the pending information is simultaneously digested even if it is not desired to simultaneously digest the pending information. It will be done. In that respect, according to the present configuration, it is possible to change whether or not to simultaneously suspend the holding information, as long as the variation display time of the game times has elapsed. This makes it possible to digest hold information as desired by the player.

  In the situation where the reserve information is simultaneously digested, if the reserve information corresponding to the jackpot is included in the simultaneously digested reserve information, the number of rounds is added according to the number of the reserve information which has been jackpotted. Be done. In order to simultaneously digest the pending information, it is necessary to operate the simultaneous digestion button 120. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to operate the simultaneous digest button 120 positively.

  The round number is added by operating the simultaneous digest button 120 by the player in a situation where there are a plurality of hold information that is a big hit among the hold information. That is, in the above situation, the number of rounds is not added unless the simultaneous digest button 120 is operated by the player. Therefore, with this configuration, when the number of rounds is added, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

  When the first starting holding ball number NA is larger than “1” and the second starting holding ball number NB is “1 to 2”, simultaneous digestion is performed in the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra I can not do it. According to the configuration, in the situation where the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb, the hold information is stored while preventing the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra from being digested first. It is possible to digest simultaneously.

  Depending on the conditions on the display screen G, if the simultaneous digest button 120 is operated in a situation where the first starting ball holding number NA is larger than "1" and the second starting ball holding number NB is "0". A first simultaneously digested image is displayed to notify that the pending information may not be simultaneously digested. This makes it possible for the player to specify that the hold information is not simultaneously digested even when the simultaneous digest button 120 is operated.

Another Example of Third Embodiment
(1) When the pending information is simultaneously digested, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which only one stop result is displayed on the display screen G, and when the pending information is simultaneously digested, on the display screen G It is also possible to have a configuration in which all the stop results of the pending information that has been simultaneously digested are displayed. Further, in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the suspension result of the suspension information that is simultaneously digested in the order in which the suspension information is acquired is displayed.

  Further, only when there is a plurality of pieces of suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning, a plurality of stop results corresponding to the jackpot winning may be displayed on the display screen G. According to the configuration, it is possible to notify the player of not only the number of the hold information that will be the jackpot win but also a plurality of stop results corresponding to the jackpot win.

  (2) When the reserve information is simultaneously digested, not only the stop result is displayed on the display screen G, but also the notice effect and the reach effect are displayed on the display screen G, and then the stop result is displayed. It may be configured as In this case, depending on whether or not the hold information to be the big hit is included in the simultaneously stored hold information, the occurrence probability of the advance notice effect and the reach effect that can be expected to be the big hit may be different. . Specifically, in the case where the suspension information to be a big hit is included in the suspension information that has been simultaneously digested, the probability of occurrence of the notice effect and the reach effect that can be expected for the big hit is high, In the case where the hold information to be a big hit is not included in the hold information, the occurrence frequency of the advance notice effect and the reach effect that can be expected for the big hit may be low. Further, the time in which the above-mentioned advance notice effect and the above-mentioned reach effect occur may be shorter in the case of simultaneous digestion than in the case of one pending information being digested.

  (3) The player may select the number of pieces of reserve information to be simultaneously digested. Specifically, the upper bulging portion 56 may be provided with a selection button operated to select the number of pieces of reserve information to be simultaneously digested. When the reserve information to be simultaneously digested can be selected, an image for determining the number of pieces of reserve information to be simultaneously digested is displayed on the display screen G. The player can select the number of pieces of reserve information to be simultaneously digested by operating the selection button. In a situation where the number of pieces of reserve information to be simultaneously digested is selected, by operating the simultaneous digest button 120, it is possible to simultaneously digest the number of pieces of reserve information selected by the player. According to this configuration, it is possible to determine the number of pieces of reserve information to be simultaneously digested according to the player's convenience.

  (4) The jackpot winning probability may be different between the case where the reserve information is simultaneously digested and the case where the reserve information is not simultaneously digested. Specifically, the ROM 63 is provided with a pass / fail table corresponding to the case where the pending information is not simultaneously digested and a pass / fail table corresponding to the case where the pending information is simultaneously digested, and the corresponding pass / fail table is referred to The determination processing may be performed. In this case, the jackpot winning probability may be lower if the holding information is simultaneously digested than when the holding information is not simultaneously digested. Here, assuming that the jackpot winning probability in the case of simultaneously digesting the held information is the same as the jackpot winning probability in the case of not simultaneously digesting the held information, the pattern in which the player digests the held information one by one is It will be difficult to select. In this case, the degree of attention to the advance presentation effect or the reach effect produced on the display screen G is reduced. In that respect, according to the present configuration, since it is set that the jackpot winning probability is higher than the case where the reserve information is not digested simultaneously with the case where the reserve information is not digested simultaneously, the reserve information is set one by one. It is possible to prevent the probability of selection of the digest pattern from becoming too low. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the degree of attention to the advance notice effect or the reach effect that occurs on the display screen G.

  (5) It may be possible to determine whether or not to reserve the pending information at the same time regardless of whether or not it is changing. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the hold information is not obtained, the hold information may be simultaneously digested every time the predetermined number of pieces of hold information is stored, by operating the simultaneous digest button 120.

  (6) When the reserve information is simultaneously digested, the acceptance determination process is performed in the order in which the suspension information is acquired, and when the jackpot is won in the acceptance decision process, the information after the reserve information for which the jackpot is won The configuration may be such that the process of judging whether the acquired hold information is in progress is not performed. Here, among the players, there may be a player who wants to digest the game times corresponding to the big hit. In that respect, according to the configuration, since the upper limit of the number of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning when the reserve information is simultaneously digested is set, the jackpot is accepted when the reserve information is simultaneously digested. If the number of pieces of pending information has reached the upper limit, the process of determining whether the pending information obtained after that has passed or not is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the number of times the effect displayed on the display screen G is seen in the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning being reduced.

  (7) When the jackpot is won in the situation where the reserve information is simultaneously digested, the reserve information acquired during the change may be a target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the situation where the reserve information is simultaneously digested, the process of judging the propriety of the reserve information acquired during the change is performed. The number of rounds is added to correspond to the number of pending information which has been jackpotted in the corresponding determination process. In this case, the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is cleared to “0”. According to the configuration, it is possible to expect the number of rounds to increase and to speed up the speed at which the pending information is digested.

Fourth Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the type of the pass / fail table to be referred to in the pass / fail determination processing of the hold information which is the target of the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<First jackpot information identification process>
The first jackpot information identification process executed in step S1003 of the jackpot winning number identification process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing a first jackpot information identification process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fourth embodiment.

  First, in step S2401, the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The first judgment processing number counter refers to the hold information stored in the first holding area Ra, which is the target of the process of judging whether the number of rounds is to be added by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 or not. It is a counter for specifying pending | holding area Ra1-Ra255 which performs a process. The initial value of the first determination processing number counter is set to “0”.

  In step S2402, the value of the corresponding big hit random number counter C1 in the first holding area Ra is grasped. In the present embodiment, the value of the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 corresponds to the holding areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first holding area Ra. Specifically, when the first determination processing number counter is “1”, the first suspension area Ra1 of the first storage area Ra corresponds, and the first determination processing number counter is “255”. , 255th reservation area Ra 255 of the first holding area Ra corresponds. In step S2402, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 corresponding to the value of the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is specifically grasped.

  In the following step S 2403, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C 1 grasped in step S 2402 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win, with reference to the probability table for the low probability mode.

  In the process of step S 2403, when the big hit is won (step S 2404: YES), 1 is added to the first big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64 in step S 2405. With the said 1st big hit number counter, pending | holding information stored in pending | holding area Ra1-Ra255 of 1st pending | holding area Ra made object of determination processing of whether the number of rounds should be added by MPU62 of the main control apparatus 60 It is a counter for specifying how much the pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2404 or if the process of step S2405 is executed, the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2406 is the value of the first starting hold ball number NA It is determined whether they are identical. If a negative determination is made in step S2406, the processes of steps S2401 to S2405 are performed again. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, the present first jackpot information identification process is ended.

<Second jackpot information identification process>
The second jackpot information identification process executed in step S1005 of the jackpot winning number identification process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a second jackpot information identification process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, at step S2501, the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The second judgment processing number counter refers to the hold information stored in the second holding area Rb that is the target of the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a counter for specifying pending areas Rb1 to Rb 254 to be processed. The initial value of the second determination processing number counter is set to “0”.

  In step S2502, the value of the corresponding big-hit random number counter C1 in the second holding area Rb is grasped. In the present embodiment, the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 corresponds to the holding areas Rb1 to Rb 254 of the second holding area Rb. Specifically, when the second determination processing number counter is “1”, the first storage area Rb1 of the second storage area Rb corresponds, and the second determination processing number counter is “254”. , And the 254 th reserved area Rb 254 of the second storage area Rb. In step S2502, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold areas Rb1 to Rb 254 corresponding to the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is specifically grasped.

  In the following step S2503, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S2502 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win, with reference to the probability table for the low probability mode.

  In the process of step S2503, if the jackpot is won (step S2504: YES), the second jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one in step S2505. The second big hit number counter is the pending information stored in the pending areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second pending area Rb that is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a counter for specifying how much the pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2504, or if the process of step S2505 is executed, the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2506 is the second starting hold ball number NB-1 Determine if it is identical to the value. If a negative determination is made in step S2506, the processes of steps S2501 to S2505 are performed again. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2506, the present second jackpot information identification process is ended.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

According to the present embodiment, the pending information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is whether to add the type of the jackpot result and the number of rounds that became the transition trigger to the open / close execution mode. Regardless of the type of the jackpot result included in the pending information to be subjected to the determination process, the success or failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode. Here, when the pending information to be subjected to the determination process whether to add the number of rounds includes pending information corresponding to the within 6R probability variation big hit result or the 16R probability variation big hit result within the retention, the relevant Assuming that in the hold information stored after the hold information, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the high probability mode, the jackpot probability of 30 when referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode is 30. Since the number is one-half, there is a possibility that the number of pieces of hold information to be jackpot winning included in the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is too large. In that respect, according to the present configuration, the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is always referred to the success / failure table for the low probability mode. Since the jackpot winning probability at the time of performing the qualification determination process referring to the probability table for the low probability mode is set to 1/300, it is an object of determination processing whether to add the number of rounds Even if the number of pending information items is large, the number of pending information items corresponding to the jackpot winning among the pending information items does not become too large. This makes it possible to prevent the number of rounds from becoming too large.

  The suspension information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is always configured with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode and the success / failure determination process is performed. Processing can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the types of tables are different.

  Type judgment processing even if the jackpot is won in the process of judging whether or not to add the number of rounds in the first jackpot information identification process and the second jackpot information identification process. Is not done. Therefore, even if the hold information corresponding to the big hit is present in the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds, the type of the lottery mode and the support mode set after the open / close execution mode is affected. Absent. As a result, it becomes possible to make it easy for the player to specify the type of the lottery mode and the support mode set at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Another Example of Fourth Embodiment
(1) In the situation where "1" is set to the 6R probability variation big hit flag or the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64, the success or failure judgment processing is performed with reference to the probability table for the low probability mode, When winning, the number of rounds to be added may be larger than 6R or 16R. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage of the situation in which the success or failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

  (2) In the first jackpot information identification process and the second jackpot information identification process, when the jackpot is won, the type determination process may be performed. In the configuration, the corresponding flag of the RAM 64 may be set to “1” or the corresponding flag of the RAM 64 may be cleared to “0” according to the type of the jackpot result in the type determination process. Specifically, in a situation in which the 6R normal jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result in the hold, the 6R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 and the pending probability change jackpot flag are set to “1”, or in the RAM 64 When the 16R normal jackpot flag and the pending indeterminate probability variation big hit flag are set to “1”, the pending probability variation probability big hit flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to “0”. Also, when “1” is set only in the 6R positive variation big hit flag or the 16R positive variation big hit flag of the RAM 64, “1” is set to the in-hold normal big hit flag of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result in the hold, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag and the hold normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 are set to “1”, or the 16R probability variation jackpot in the RAM 64 If the flag and the in-hold normal jackpot flag are set to “1”, the in-hold normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to “0”. In addition, when “1” is set only in the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64, “1” is set in the pending probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64. According to the configuration, it becomes possible to set the pass / fail lottery mode and the support mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result included in the hold information subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds.

Fifth Embodiment
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the handling of the hold information acquired in the open / close execution mode. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<Playing state transition processing>
The gaming state transition processing executed in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the open / close execution mode. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2602, and it is determined whether it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern in the upper operation opening display portion 33 or the lower operation opening display portion 34 of 1 is finished. When it is not the timing when the variable display ends, the main game state transition processing ends.

  If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S2603 whether the success or failure result of the gaming round ended this time corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R regular jackpot flag, or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64. As described above, when the jackpot is won in response to the winning of the upper operation opening 23, "1" is set to one of the 6R normal jackpot flag and the 6R probability variation jackpot flag. Further, when a big hit is made in response to the winning of the lower operation port 24, “1” is set to any one of the 16R normal big hit flag and the 16R probability variation big hit flag. If it does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2603, it is determined in step S2604 whether the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 6R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1".

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, "6" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2605, and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is opened. Set "1000" as a waiting period for The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, the waiting period for opening is 2 seconds. However, the waiting period is optional.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2604, "16" is set in round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64b of RAM 64 in step S2606, and timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64b of RAM 64. Set "1000" as a waiting period for opening.

  If the process of step S2605 has been executed, or if the process of step S2606 has been executed, it is determined in step S2607 whether "1" is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 or not. The extension flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the continuation effect is to be generated as if the open / close execution mode is continued after the open / close execution mode is ended in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a determination process for determining whether or not the above continuous effect is generated is performed during the open / close execution mode, and the above continuous effect is generated in the determination process. If it is determined, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". By setting “1” to the extension flag, it is possible to perform processing corresponding to the case of generating the continuous effect. The process (steps S2619 and S2620) in the case where the positive determination is made in step S2607 will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2607, an opening command is set in step S2608, and the game state transition processing is ended. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes setting processing of effects for the open / close execution mode. The light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the open / close execution mode is performed according to the set effect pattern, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed.

  Next, the sound emission control apparatus 90 transmits to the display control apparatus 100 an open / close execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the setting process of the effect for the open / close execution mode. In the display control device 100, based on the received command for opening / closing execution mode, a data table is read out from the program ROM 103 in order to perform effects for the present opening / closing execution mode by the symbol display device 31, and predetermined according to the data table The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 each time the image update timing is reached (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. The above data table is an information group in which processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image is defined when displaying a moving image corresponding to a received command on the display screen G. is there.

  Specifically, in the effect at the opening time when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is not set to "1", the character is displayed on the display screen G, and "round game starts!" Is displayed adjacent to the character. Ru. This makes it possible for the player to easily identify that the round game is to be started.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, the special winning opening / closing process is executed in step S2609. The special winning opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process performed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, it is determined in step S2701 whether the special winning opening 22a is open. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, it is determined in step S2702 whether or not the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0". By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the process of opening the large winning opening 22a, which will be described later, from being performed in a situation where a trigger to open the large winning opening 22a has not occurred. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the present special winning opening / closing process is ended as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0". By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the process of opening the large winning opening 22a, which will be described later, from being performed when the timer counter T is not "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the present special winning opening / closing process is ended.

  When the round counter RC is not "0" and the timer counter T is "0", the special winning opening opening process is executed in step S2704. In the special winning opening opening process, first, "10" is set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 as the upper limit number which is one end condition of the round game. The said prize-winning upper limit counter PC is a counter for specifying by MPU62 the upper limit number which is one completion | finish conditions of a round game as mentioned above.

  Next, “15000” is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, one subtraction process is performed every predetermined time (2 msec), and it becomes "0" about 30 seconds after "15000" is set in the timer counter T.

  Next, release execution processing is executed. In the open execution process, drive control of the variable prize drive unit 22c is performed so that the big winning opening 22a is in the open state. Thereafter, the present large winning opening opening processing is ended.

  When the process of step S2704 is executed, an open command is set in step S2705, and the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. The release command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the sound emission control device 90 receives the release command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, first, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 22a is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed. Run.

  Next, an open command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in order to make the display control device 100 recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 22a has been started. The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 switches the range of pointer information to be referred to in the data table based on the received release command. As a result, an effect corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 22a is displayed on the display screen G.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2701 that the special winning opening 22a is open, the flow proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether or not the open continuation time for opening of the current special winning opening 22a has elapsed by determining whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0". Determine

  If a negative determination is made in step S2706, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening 22a. When the game ball is not winning in the special winning opening 22a, the main winning opening opening and closing process is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, the prize upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is decremented by "1" in step S2708. In the following step S2709, it is determined whether the winning upper limit counter PC is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2709, the present special winning opening / closing process is ended.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, a closing execution process is executed in step S2710. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable prize drive unit 22c is ended so that the big winning opening 22a is closed. In the subsequent step S 2711, a closing command is set. The closing command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the sound emission control device 90 receives the closing command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, first, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the closing time of the special winning opening 22a is executed and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed. Run.

  Next, a closing command is sent to the display control device 100 in order to make the display control device 100 recognize that the closing of the special winning opening 22a has been started. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 switches the range of pointer information to be referred to in the data table based on the received closing command. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the closing time of the big winning opening 22a is displayed on the display screen G.

  When the process of step S2711 is executed, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is decremented by 1 in step S2712. In the following step S2713, it is determined whether the round counter RC is "0".

  If the negative determination is made in step S2713, the notification identification process is executed in step S2714. The notification identification process will be described with reference to FIG. The notification specifying process is a process for specifying whether or not various notification effects to be described later are generated during the round game. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the notice specifying process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60.

  First, in step S 2801, it is determined whether “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 6R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the on-hold pass / fail judgment process is performed is different according to the number of rounds corresponding to the present jackpot result. The on-hold status determination process is a process for specifying whether or not the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the obtained on-hold information. The details of the in-hold propriety determination process will be described later. By providing the process of step S2801, it is possible to make the timing at which the on-hold in-progress / outside determination process is performed differ according to the number of rounds corresponding to the present jackpot result.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "4" in step S2802. If a negative determination is made in step S2802, the present notification identification process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2801, it is determined in step S2803 whether the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "11". If a negative determination is made in step S2803, the notification identification process is ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2803, it is determined in step S2804 whether the first starting holding ball number NA and the second starting holding ball number NB are "0". . When an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, the present notification identification process is ended as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2804, a process of determining whether or not there is a hold is performed in step S2805. The pending / non-pending condition determination process will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the on-hold status determination process is a process for specifying whether or not the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the obtained on-hold information. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the on-hold pass / fail judgment process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether the second starting hold ball number NB is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2901, a second hold acceptance determination process is executed in step S2902. The second hold yes / no determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The second suspension pass / fail judgment process is a process for performing a pass / fail decision process on the suspension information stored in the second suspension area Rb in the open / close execution mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit number of pieces of suspension information that can be stored in each of the suspension areas Ra and Rb is set to four. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the second hold acceptance decision processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3001, an acceptance determination process is executed. The present determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the success / failure determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3101, the value of the corresponding big hit random number counter C1 is grasped. Specifically, in the case of the success / failure determination process executed in step S3001, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Rb1 of the second holding area Rb is grasped.

  In step S3102, it is determined whether the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". If the big hit result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode results in a 6R normal big hit result, the 6R normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, and the big hit result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is 16R In the case of a normal jackpot result, the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of the hit / fail table to be referred to in the hit / not determination process are different between the case of the 6R, 16R normal jackpot result and the case of the 6R, 16R probability variation jackpot result. Therefore, by providing the process of step S3102, it becomes possible to perform the yes or no determination process with reference to the success or failure table corresponding to the jackpot result that has become the transition trigger to the open / close execution mode.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined in step S3101 is included in the value corresponding to the jackpot win, with reference to the probability table for the low probability mode in step S3103. Determine if Thereafter, the true / false determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S3102, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S3101 is included in the value corresponding to the jackpot win with reference to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode in step S3104. Determine if there is. Thereafter, the true / false determination process is ended.

  Returning to the description of the second suspension pass / fail judgment process (FIG. 41), if a jackpot is won in the process of step S3103 or step S3104 (step S3002: YES), the extension flag of the RAM 64 is “1” in step S3003. Is set, and the second hold pass / fail judgment processing is ended. As described above, the extension flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the continuation effect is to be generated as if the open / close execution mode continues after the open / close execution mode ends in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3002, it is determined in step S3004 whether or not the second starting reserved ball number NB is larger than "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3004, the second suspension acceptance decision processing is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3004, the processing of step S3005 to step S3007 is executed. The process of the said step S3005-step S3007 is the same as the process of step S3001-step S3003. However, the second holding area Rb2 of the second holding area Rb is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3005.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3006, it is determined in step S3008 whether or not the second starting reserved ball number NB is larger than "2". If a negative determination is made in step S3008, the second suspension acceptance decision processing is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3008, the processing of step S3009 to step S3011 is executed. The process of the said step S3009-step S3011 is the same as the process of step S3001-step S3003. However, the third holding area Rb3 of the second holding area Rb is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3009.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3010, it is determined in step S3012 whether or not the second starting reserved ball number NB is larger than "3". If a negative determination is made in step S3012, the second suspension acceptance decision processing is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3012, the process of step S3013 is executed. The process of step S3013 is the same as the process of step S3001. However, the fourth holding area Rb4 of the second holding area Rb is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3013.

  In the following step S3014, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S3014, the second suspension acceptance decision processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3014, the hold series flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S3015, and the second hold yes / no determination processing is ended. The said pending connection flag is a flag for specifying whether the effect | action which alert | reports that the pending | holding information corresponding to big hit is contained in pending | holding in MPU62 of the main control apparatus 60 is generated.

  According to this configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 to the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, the RAM 64 is extended. When the flag is set to “1” and the hold information stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb includes the hold information corresponding to the big hit, the hold series flag in the RAM 64 "1" is set. Although details will be described later, when “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, a notification effect is generated to notify that stored information that is a big hit is stored in the open / close execution mode, and open / close execution is performed. After the end of the mode, a continuous effect occurs as if the open / close execution mode is continuing. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the hold continuation flag of the RAM 64, a notification effect is generated to notify that the hold information which is a big hit is stored in the open / close execution mode, but the open / close execution mode is ended. The above-mentioned continuation presentation does not occur later. Here, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the variation display time of the game times is shortened until the game times are executed three times. That is, although the variation display time of the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Rb1 to the third suspension area Rb3 of the second suspension area Rb is shortened, the change of display time of the suspension information is shortened to the fourth suspension area Rb4 of the second suspension area Rb. The fluctuation display time of the stored hold information is not shortened. Therefore, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, it takes time until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is digested. If the time until the round game is started becomes long in the situation where the above continuous effect is generated, it will not be possible for the player to think as if the round game has been extended. In that respect, according to the present configuration, when the fourth holding area Rb4 of the second holding area Rb includes the holding information corresponding to the big hit, the holding continuation flag is “1” instead of the extension flag of the RAM 64. Is set. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming unable to think as if the round game has been extended.

  Furthermore, according to the configuration, when the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb includes the hold information corresponding to the big hit, the hold continuous flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. Although the continuous effect does not occur, the notification effect occurs. Here, since the player is expecting the continuation of the open / close execution mode, if the above continuous effect is not generated, the player will be disappointed. In that respect, according to this configuration, since the notification effect is generated even in the situation where the continuous effect is not generated, it is possible to suppress a disappointing feeling that the continuous effect is not generated.

  Returning to the description of the pending / not-pending process (FIG. 40), when the process of step S2902 is executed, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the extension flag or the pending link flag of the RAM 64 in step S2903. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2903, the process of determining whether or not the on-hold status is complete is ended.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the second reserve area Rb includes reserve information corresponding to a big hit, the first reserve yes / no determination process described later is not performed. The first suspension pass / fail judgment process is a process for performing a pass / fail decision process for the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra in the open / close execution mode. By providing the process of step S2903, in a situation where the second holding area Rb includes the holding information corresponding to the big hit, it is prevented that the first holding good or bad judgment processing described later is performed. Is possible.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2903, it is determined in step S2904 whether or not "1" is set in the 6R probability variation big hit flag or the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, the process of determining whether or not the on-hold status is complete is ended.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode is the 6R probability variation big hit result or the 16R probability variation big hit result, the first holdability determination process described later is performed. Absent. Therefore, by providing the process of step S2904, if the type of jackpot result that became the transition trigger of the open / close execution mode is the 6R probability variation big hit result or the 16R probability variation big hit result, the first suspension of pass / fail judgment processing described later is performed. It becomes possible to prevent being broken.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2904, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not the first starting reserved ball number NA is "0". When an affirmative determination is made in step S2905, the process of determining whether or not the on-hold status is complete is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2905, in step S2906, a first hold success / failure determination process is executed. Although the details will be described later, in the first hold success / failure determination process, the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in the open / close execution mode.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, it is determined in step S2907 whether "1" is set in the 6R probability variation big hit flag or the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 or not. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2907, the process of determining whether or not the on-hold reservation is completed is ended. Here, the case in which the negative determination is made in step S2907 is a case in which the type of jackpot result that has triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode is the 6R normal jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, the first hold success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Absent. On the other hand, if the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends, if the hold information is stored in the first hold area Ra, the first hold good or bad judgment processing targeting the hold information Is done. Therefore, by providing the process of step S2907, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the first hold suitability determination process in accordance with the type of the jackpot result that has triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2907, the first suspension acceptance determination process is executed in step S2906, and the online suspension acceptance determination process is ended. The first hold success / failure determination process will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the first suspension acceptance decision process is a process for performing the admission determination process targeting suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra in the open / close execution mode. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the first hold success / failure determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3201, a success or failure determination process is executed. The specific process is the same as step S3001. However, the first hold area Ra1 of the first hold area Ra is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3201.

  In the following step S3202, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won in the qualification processing performed in the above step S3201. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the pending series flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S3203, and the first pending yes / no determination process ends. As described above, with the pending link flag, it is specified by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 whether to generate an effect notifying that the pending information corresponding to the big hit is included in the pending status. Is the flag of

  If a negative determination is made in step S3202, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the first start-holding ball number NA is larger than "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3204, the first suspension acceptance process is ended.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, the processing of step S3205 to step S3207 is executed. The process of the said step S3205-step S3207 is the same as the process of step S3201-step S3203. However, the second holding area Ra2 of the first holding area Ra is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3205.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3206, it is determined in step S3208 whether or not the first starting reserved ball number NA is larger than "2". If a negative determination is made in step S3208, the first suspension acceptance decision processing is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3208, the processing of step S3209 to step S3211 is executed. The process of the said step S3209-step S3211 is the same as the process of step S3201-step S3203. However, the third holding area Ra3 of the first holding area Ra is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3209.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3210, it is determined in step S3212 whether or not the first starting reserved ball number NA is larger than "3". If a negative determination is made in step S 3212, the first suspension acceptance decision processing is ended as it is.

  When an affirmation judging is carried out at Step S3212, processing of Step S3213-Step S3215 is performed. The process of the said step S3213-step S3215 is the same as the process of step S3201-step S3203. However, the fourth holding area Ra4 of the first holding area Ra is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3213.

  According to this configuration, when the first holding area Ra1 to the fourth holding area Ra4 of the first holding area Ra includes the holding information corresponding to the big hit, the holding continuation flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". Be done. Here, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information may be stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is digested. There is. In the present embodiment, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is preferentially digested prior to the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Therefore, there is a possibility that the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is digested before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is digested. As described above, in the present embodiment, after the end of the opening and closing execution mode until the game times are executed three times, the variation display time of the game times is shortened, so after the end of the opening and closing execution mode When the game is executed four times or more, the variable display time of the game game is not shortened. Therefore, when the first holding area Ra1 to the fourth holding area Ra4 of the first holding area Ra includes holding information corresponding to a big hit, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". Then, when a continuation effect occurs as if the open / close execution mode is continued after the end of the open / close execution mode, it may take time until the round game is started. In this case, it becomes impossible for the player to seem as if the round game has been extended. In that respect, according to the present configuration, when the first holding area Ra1 to the fourth holding area Ra4 of the first holding area Ra includes holding information corresponding to a big hit, the RAM 64 of the RAM 64 is selected instead of the extension flag of the RAM 64. Since “1” is set in the holding link flag, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to think as if the round game has been extended.

  If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is identified, the process of judging whether to hold or not later than the hold information is not performed. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, at a timing at which the hold information corresponding to the big hit is identified, a notification effect is generated to notify that the hold information to be the big hit is stored. Here, even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is specified, if the acceptance decision processing is performed in the other hold information, hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the other hold information. The above-described notification effect occurs even when the user is identified, so the above-mentioned notification effect occurs a plurality of times in one opening / closing execution mode. In this case, since it is specified to the player that a plurality of pieces of suspension information to be a big hit are stored in the suspension information, the jackpot is won in the suspension information when making the player play the next opening / closing execution mode It becomes impossible to be able to be surprised whether the suspension information corresponding to is stored. In this respect, according to the present configuration, when the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot win is identified, the on / off determination process which is scheduled to be performed after the suspension information is not performed. It is not specified to the player that a plurality of are stored. As a result, when making the player play the open / close execution mode, it is possible to prevent the user from being unable to get excited about whether or not the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the hold information. Become.

  If the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode is the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the first holding area Ra is not set as the target of the on-hold propriety judgment process. If the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is the 6R probability variation big hit result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the termination of the opening / closing mode. In the case of the high frequency support mode, the probability that a winning on the lower operating port 24 occurs than the upper operating port 23 is high. Further, as described above, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is preferentially digested prior to the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Therefore, in a situation where the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R probability variation big hit result or the 16R probability variation big hit result, the first hold good or bad judgment processing is performed, but the first There is a possibility that the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra, which is the target of the suspension pass / fail determination process, is not set as an execution trigger of the game run for a long time. In that respect, according to the present embodiment, when the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode is the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the first hold success / failure determination process is not performed Therefore, it is possible to prevent the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra, which is the target of the first suspension pass / fail determination process, from becoming unset as the game opportunity execution trigger for a long period of time It becomes possible.

  Returning to the description of the notification specifying process (FIG. 39), when the process of step S2805 is executed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 in step S2806.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, a round game extension notification command is set in step S2807, and the notification identification process is ended. The said round game extension alerting | reporting command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in a normal process (FIG. 12). When the sound emission control device 90 receives the round game extension notification command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes light emission control of the display lamp portion 54 corresponding to the round game extension notification command and Execute output control of.

  Next, the above-mentioned round game extension informing command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as it is. Here, processing of the display control device 100 corresponding to the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing display control processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 receives the round game extension notification command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S3301: YES), the setting process for the first notification in step S3302. Run. Specifically, information for displaying an image notifying that the extension of the round game has been decided is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thus, the image is displayed on the display screen G. The said image is demonstrated referring FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45 (a) is an explanatory diagram for describing an image for notifying that the extension of the round game has been determined.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), on the display screen G, an image of “extension decision of round game!” Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to think that the round game will be extended.

  Returning to the description of the notification specifying process (FIG. 39), if a negative determination is made in step S2806, it is determined in step S2808 whether "1" is set in the holding series flag of the RAM 64 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2808, the present notification identification process is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, a hold on one hand notification command is set in step S2809. The hold series notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). When the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold series notification command from the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60, the sound emission control apparatus 90 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the hold series notification command and Execute control. Next, the hold series notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 receives the hold series notification command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S3303: YES), the setting process for the second notification is performed in step S3304. Run. Specifically, information for displaying an image to notify that the held information corresponding to the big hit is included in the obtained held information is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thus, the image is displayed on the display screen G. The said image is demonstrated referring FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45 (b) is an explanatory diagram for describing an image for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the obtained hold information.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (b), an image of "There is hold information corresponding to a big hit in the hold!" Is displayed on the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player that the hold information acquired includes the hold information corresponding to the big hit.

  Returning to the explanation of the special winning opening / closing process (FIG. 38), when the process of step S2714 is executed, "500" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2715. End the special winning opening opening and closing process. The numerical information set in the timer counter T in the processing is numerical information for the open standby until the variable winning device 22 changes from the open state to the closed state and then to the open state again, and this pachinko machine In 10, 1 sec is set.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2713, an ending process is performed in step S2716. The ending process will be described with reference to FIG. The ending process is a process performed when the round game of the upper limit number of times is finished. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the ending process performed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60.

  First, in step S3401, it is determined whether "1" is set in the extension flag or the hold combination flag of the RAM 64 or not. In this embodiment, if it is not possible to specify the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit in the on-hold in-progress determination process performed in the specific number of rounds, the on-off in-progress determination process is performed again at the end of the round game. . Therefore, by providing the process of step S3401, if the hold information corresponding to the big hit is specified in the hold in place hold determination process performed in the specific number of rounds, the hold in place hold determination process is performed again. It is possible to prevent the

  If a negative determination is made in step S3401, it is determined in step S3402 whether the first starting holding ball number NA and the second starting holding ball number NB are "0". If a negative determination is made in step S3402, a pending / non-pending propriety determination process is executed in step S3403. As described above, the on-hold status determination process is a process for specifying whether or not the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the obtained on-hold information. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in step S2805.

  According to the present embodiment, the process of judging whether or not on hold is performed not only at the specific number of rounds but also at the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times. Since it is possible to obtain hold information even during a round game, new hold information is obtained from the time the on-hold propriety judgment process is performed in a specific number of rounds to the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times There is a possibility. Therefore, by configuring to perform the in-hold propriety judgment process at the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times, the hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the hold information until the end of the round game It is possible to make a player play a round game while making the player expect.

  The in-hold propriety check process for the same hold information in one open / close execution mode may be performed multiple times. Here, assuming that the in-hold propriety judgment process is performed only once in the same hold information, the hold information which is the determination target of the in-hold propriety judgment process executed in the specific number of rounds is stored in the RAM 64. Need to remember. In that respect, according to the present configuration, the in-hold propriety check processing targeting the same hold information in one opening / closing execution mode can be executed multiple times, so the in-hold propriety check processing performed in a specific number of rounds There is no need to store in the RAM 64 the pending information that has become the target of the determination of. This makes it possible to prevent the capacity of the RAM 64 from becoming too large.

  After the process of step S3403 is executed, it is determined in step S3404 whether or not "1" is set in the extension flag or the pending link flag of the RAM 64. If the determination in step S3402 is affirmative, or if the determination in step S3404 is negative, a normal ending command is set in step S3405. The normal ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the voice emission control device 90 has received the normal ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the audio light emission control device 90 executes normal ending correspondence processing. In the normal ending correspondence process, first, light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 at the time of normal ending is performed, and output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed.

  Next, the content of the success / failure lottery result included in the normal ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the content of the normal ending effect corresponding to the content of the success / failure lottery result is executed. After executing the normal ending correspondence processing, the normal ending command corresponding to the processing result of the normal ending correspondence processing is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 receives the normal ending command from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 (step S3305: YES), the data table for normal ending corresponding to the normal ending command in step S3306. Are read from the program ROM 103. The display control apparatus 100 outputs a drawing list to the VDP 105 each time (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec) the image update timing predetermined in accordance with the data table for normal ending is reached. Thus, the normal ending effect determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 is executed. In the above normal ending effect in the case where the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, “Mother” is displayed on the display screen G, and the 6R probability variation jackpot flag or 16R of the RAM 64 is displayed. In the above-mentioned normal ending effect in the case where “1” is set to the probability variation big hit flag, “another one” is displayed on the display screen G.

  Returning to the description of the ending process (FIG. 46), if an affirmative determination is made in step S3401 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S3404, whether or not "1" is set in the extension flag of RAM 64 in step S3406. judge. In the present embodiment, the ending effect differs between when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” and when the hold continuation flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. Therefore, by providing the process of step S3406, it becomes possible to execute the ending effect corresponding to the flag in which "1" is set.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3406, a first special ending command is set in step S3407. The first special ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the voice emission control device 90 receives the first special ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 executes a first special ending handling process. In the first special ending corresponding process, first, light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 at the time of the first special ending is performed, and output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed.

  Next, processing for determining the content of the first special ending effect corresponding to the first special ending command received this time is executed. After the first special ending corresponding process is executed, the first special ending command corresponding to the processing result of the first special ending corresponding process is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 receives the first special ending command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S3307: YES), the display control device 100 responds to the first special ending command in step S3308. (1) The data table for special ending is read out from the program ROM 103. The display control apparatus 100 outputs a drawing list to the VDP 105 every time (in a cycle of, for example, 20 msec) the image update timing determined in advance according to the data table for the first special ending. Thus, the first special ending effect determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 is executed.

  An image displayed in the first special ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram for describing an image displayed in the first special ending effect.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), “Extension of next round game” is displayed on the display screen G. This makes it possible for the player to think that the round game will be extended.

  Returning to the description of the ending process (FIG. 46), if a negative determination is made in step S3406, a second special ending command is set in step S3408. The case where the negative determination is made in step S3406 is the case where "1" is set in the holding combination flag of the RAM 64. The second special ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the voice emission control device 90 receives the second special ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 executes a second special ending handling process. In the second special ending handling process, first, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 at the time of the second special ending is performed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed.

  Next, processing for determining the content of the second special ending effect corresponding to the second special ending command received this time is executed. After the second special ending corresponding process is executed, the second special ending command corresponding to the processing result of the second special ending corresponding process is transmitted to the display control device 100.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 receives the second special ending command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S3309: YES), the display control device 100 responds to the second special ending command in step S3310. 2) Read the data table for special ending from the program ROM 103. The display control apparatus 100 outputs a drawing list to the VDP 105 each time an image update timing predetermined in accordance with the data table for the second special ending is reached (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). Thus, the second special ending effect determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 is executed.

  An image displayed in the second special ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). FIG. 47B is an explanatory diagram for describing an image displayed in the second special ending effect.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (b), “next hold series” is displayed on the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to easily notify the player that the obtained hold information includes the hold information corresponding to the big hit.

  According to the present embodiment, a plurality of timings at which a notification effect is generated to notify that stored information to be a big hit is stored in one opening / closing execution mode are set. Here, in the configuration in which the in-hold propriety judgment process is performed a plurality of times in one opening / closing execution mode, if the timing at which the notification effect is generated is set to one, the player generates the notification effect. Only one timing can be excited depending on whether or not. In that respect, according to the present configuration, the notification effect may occur not only at the specific number of rounds, but also at the end of the upper limit number of round games. As a result, the chance of being able to be excited can be increased depending on whether or not the above-mentioned notification effect occurs, and it is possible to further entertain the player.

  Returning to the description of the ending process (FIG. 46), when the process of step S3405 is executed, the process of step S3407 is executed, or the process of step S3408 is executed, various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are selected in step S3409. In the timer counter T provided, “2000” is set as a waiting period for ending, and this ending processing is ended. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, the waiting period for ending is 4 seconds. However, the waiting period is optional.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37), when the process of step S2609 is executed, it is determined in step S2610 whether the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0". Do. If a negative determination is made in step S2610, the present gaming state transition process is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2610, it is determined in step S2611 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2611, the present gaming state transition processing is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2611, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S2612. Specifically, when the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1” in a situation where the 6R positive variation big hit flag or the 16R positive probability big hit flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the high probability mode of the RAM 64 If the flag is set to "1" and the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the state is maintained. Also, when the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is not set to "1", the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", and when the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". , Maintain that state.

  On the other hand, when the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” while the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the high probability mode flag is set to “0 If the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is not set to "1", the state is maintained. Also, when the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the high frequency support flag is cleared to "0", and when the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is not set to "1", Maintain the state.

  If the process of step S2612 is executed, it is determined in step S2613 whether "1" is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 or not. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2613, a round game extension standby command is set in step S2614. The round game extension standby command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 at step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12), and it is recognized that the voice emission control device 90 transitions to the extension standby period of the round game after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Be done. In the extended standby period of the round game, an image is displayed as if the round game is extended on the display screen G until the game times corresponding to the big hit are finished after the open / close execution mode is ended. Period of time.

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the above-mentioned round game extension standby command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes the emission control of the display lamp portion 54 corresponding to the round game extension standby command. Execute output control of. Next, the above-mentioned round game extension standby command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 has received the above-mentioned round game extension standby command from the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 (step S3311: YES), the data table for the extension standby period in step S3312. Are read from the program ROM 103. The display control apparatus 100 outputs a drawing list to the VDP 105 each time (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec) the image update timing predetermined in accordance with the data table for the extension standby period. Thereby, the effect for the extension standby period of the round game is executed on the display screen G. Here, an image displayed in the extension standby period of the round game will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 48 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining an image displayed in the extension standby period of the round game.

  As shown in (a) of FIG. 48, on the display screen G, “In preparation for round game for extension” is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that it is a waiting time until the extension round game is started.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2613, it is determined in step S2615 whether "1" is set in the hold continuation flag of the RAM 64 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2615, the pending series flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S2616.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2615, or if the process of step S2616 is performed, the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S2617. The game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of game times executed after the open / close execution mode is ended by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. The number-of-games counter is incremented by "1" each time a variation start process described later is performed.

  In the following step S2618, the flag in which "1" is set among the 6R normal jackpot flag, 6R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R regular jackpot flag, and 16R probability jackpot flag is cleared to "0", and the game state transition processing is performed. Finish.

  Next, processing (processing in step S2619 and processing in step S2620) performed when the processing in step S2607 is positively determined will be described. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2607, a round game extension start command is set in step S2619. The said round game extension start command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 by step S401 in a normal process (FIG. 12).

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the above-mentioned round game extension start command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 according to the effect pattern for the open / close execution mode for the extension. The output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed. Next, the above-mentioned round game extension start command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 has received the above-mentioned round game extension start command from the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 (step S3313: YES), the above-mentioned round game extension start command is made in step S3314. The data table for the corresponding extended switching execution mode is read out from the program ROM 103. The display control apparatus 100 outputs a drawing list to the VDP 105 each time (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec) the image update timing predetermined in accordance with the data table for the extended open / close execution mode. Thereby, the effect for the open / close execution mode for the extension is executed on the display screen G. Here, an image displayed on the display screen G when the open / close execution mode for the extended portion is started will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 (b) is an explanatory diagram for describing an image displayed when the open / close execution mode for the extended portion is started.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (b), “Extended round game start!” Is displayed on the display screen G. This makes it possible for the player to think that the extended round game has been started.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing (FIG. 37), when the processing of step S2619 is executed, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S2620, and the present gaming state transition processing is ended.

  According to the present embodiment, in the open / close execution mode, a process of judging whether or not the acceptance information stored in the areas for suspension Ra and Rb is the target is determined. After the end of the round game corresponding to the jackpot result which has become the transition trigger to the open / close execution mode, “during the preparation of a round game for an extension” is displayed on the display screen G. Then, when the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is digested, “the start of the round game for the extension!” Is displayed on the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to make the player think as if the round game has been extended, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process executed in step S505 of the game number control process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, the processes of steps S3501 to S3508 are similar to the processes of steps S701 to S708, and the process of step S3510 is similar to the process of step S709. When the process of step S3508 is executed, the jackpot selection number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one in step S3509. The said jackpot winning frequency counter is a counter for specifying the jackpot winning frequency by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. The jackpot winning number counter is cleared to “0” by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

  When the process of step S3509 is performed or when the process of step S3510 is performed, the number-of-playings counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by "1" in step S3511. The game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of game times executed after the open / close execution mode is ended by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as described above.

  In the subsequent step S3512, the variable display time related process is executed. The variable display time related process will be described with reference to FIG. The said fluctuation | variation display time related process is a process performed in order to set the fluctuation | variation display time of the pattern in the display part 33 for upper operating ports and the display part 34 for lower operating ports. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the variable display time related process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0". The jackpot number-of-hits counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has won a jackpot as described above. Each time the jackpot is won, the jackpot number counter is incremented by one.

  Here, when the number of times the jackpot is won since the game of the pachinko machine 10 is started is 0, the fluctuation display time is set with reference to the fluctuation type counter CS provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. Be done. On the other hand, when the number of times the jackpot is won is one or more, a predetermined fluctuation display time is set until the number of times of game play reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, by providing the process of step S3601, it is possible to prevent the predetermined fluctuation display time from being set in a situation where the number of times the jackpot is won is zero.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3601, it is determined in step S3602 whether the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is less than "4". The game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of game times executed after the open / close execution mode is ended by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as described above. The game number counter is incremented by one each time the game time is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of times the jackpot has been won since the start of the game of the pachinko machine 10 is one or more, the predetermined variation display time on condition that the number of times of the game is less than four. It is set. Therefore, by providing the process of step S3602, the predetermined variation display time is set when the number of times played is four or more in a situation where the number of times the jackpot is won is one or more. It is possible to block

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, "250" is set in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S3603, and this variable display time related process is ended. The numerical information set in the variable display time counter is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. That is, the value becomes "0" about 0.5 seconds after the numerical information is set in the variable display time counter. In the present embodiment, the above 0.5 sec is set as the shortest of the fluctuation display time. However, it is not limited that the shortest of the variation display time is 0.5 sec, and a period from displaying “under preparation for round game” on the display screen G to starting of the next round game If the player is considered not to feel long, the shortest variation display time is optional. Further, the numerical information set in the variable display time counter in step S3603 is not limited to the shortest configuration among the variable display times set in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, It is optional as long as the player does not feel as long as the period from the display on the display screen G as "in preparation for round game" to the start of the next round game.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3601 or a negative determination is made in step 3602, setting processing of the variable display time is executed in step S3604, and the present variable display time-related processing is ended. In the setting process of the fluctuation display time, numerical information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set in the fluctuation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  According to the present embodiment, the upper limit number of times of game play is set to three, in which the variation display time is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the shortest after the open / close execution mode ends. Therefore, the variation display time is not set to be shortest after the number of times of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is four or more. Thus, when the second holding area Rb stores the holding information corresponding to the big hit, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to all the holding information from ending in a short period of time. It becomes. Further, according to the configuration, since the game play triggered by the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is executed for a long period, new hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb during that time It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation in which no hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb. Here, as described above, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is more advantageous than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. According to the configuration in which the upper limit number of game times is set to three, in which the variation display time is set to the shortest 0.5 sec after the opening / closing execution mode ends, as described above, the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb. It is less likely to disadvantage the player because it is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence of an unstored situation.

  Even if the hold information obtained until the end of the round game of the upper limit number of times does not include the hold information corresponding to the big hit, the fluctuation display time is shortest after the open / close execution mode is ended 0.5 sec Set to Here, when the notification effect for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the obtained hold information does not occur, the big hit is dealt with in the obtained hold information. The player is identified as not including the pending information. In this case, it is necessary for the player to digest the game times specified not to be a jackpot winning. In that respect, according to the present configuration, even after the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not included in the hold information acquired until the round game of the upper limit number of times is finished, the fluctuation after the opening / closing execution mode ends The display time is set to 0.5 sec, which is the shortest. As a result, it is possible to prevent accumulation of frustration for having to wait for a long time until the game times specified to be not winning jackpots are digested.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 49), when the process of step S 3512 is executed, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 in step S 3513. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the variation command and the type command are not set. Therefore, by providing the process of step S 3513, it is possible to prevent the setting of the fluctuation command and the type command when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S 3513, a change command and a type command are set in step S 3514. The variable command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 determines that the type of jackpot result is 6R normal jackpot result, 6R probability oddity jackpot result, 16R normal jackpot result, and 16R probability oddity jackpot result based on the received variable command and type command. Identify if there is.

  In the case of any of 6R normal jackpot result, 6R probability variation jackpot result, 16R regular jackpot result, and 16R probability variation jackpot result, the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of jackpot result is executed. Specifically, first, when the type of the big hit result of this time is 6R normal big hit result and 16R normal big hit result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same even symbols is established on one valid line L1 to L5 Is determined as the information on the stop result this time. In this case, the types of even symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In addition, when the type of the big hit result of this time is 6R probability variation big hit result and 16R probability variation big hit result, the information corresponding to the stop result where the combination of the same odd symbol is established on one valid line L1 to L5 Determined as stop result information. In this case, the types of odd symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In addition, when the current game result is a result of the out-of-order, the out-side symbol determination processing is executed. Specifically, based on the content of the change command, it is determined whether or not it is a game round related to the occurrence of the off reach display, and in the case of a game round related to the occurrence of the off reach display, one valid line The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is removed on L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the type of combination of out-of-reach reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Moreover, in this determination, the stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is not stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined. In addition, when it is not the game time which relates to the occurrence of the off reach indication, the combination of the same symbol does not stop display on any effective line L1-L5, furthermore the off reach symbol combination stops Information corresponding to the non-displayed stop result is determined as information of the current stop result.

  Next, based on the received command for variation and type command, an effect pattern of game times related to the start of variation is determined. In this case, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 of the sound emission control device 90, the effect continuation period corresponding to the currently received variable command and type command is selected, and Select content The MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the game round related to the start of fluctuation and the output control of the speaker unit 55 according to the determined effect pattern.

  Next, the display control device 100 displays the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of the symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of the jackpot result or the symbol determination processing for removal, and the pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the game round related to the fluctuation start. Send to

  Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for causing the symbol display device 31 to provide the effects of the game cycle related to the start of fluctuation. The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 each time the image update timing predetermined in accordance with the table is reached (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). As a result, in the symbol display device 31, according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, effects for the game circulation are executed, and the stop result determined by the MPU 92 is finally displayed as a stop Be done.

  In the present embodiment, when “1” is not set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, an effect for game circulation is executed on the display screen G according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. Be done. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of the game cycle is different according to the number of game cycles executed after the end of the open / close execution mode.

  Specifically, the stop symbol is displayed on the display screen G without the occurrence of the variable display of the symbol or the reach effect, until the number of game rounds executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is three. After the number of times of game rounds executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is four times or more, the stop symbol is displayed after the fluctuation display of the symbol or the reach effect is generated on the display screen G.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, the process of step S3514 is not performed, and therefore the variation command and the type command are not transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Therefore, when “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, the effect for the above-mentioned game cycle is not executed on the display screen G.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S 3513, or if the process of step S 3514 is executed, variation display of the pattern is started on the upper operation opening display unit 33 or the lower operation opening display unit 34 in step S 3515. End the fluctuation start process.

  According to this configuration, when “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, the display screen is displayed even if the variation display of the pattern is performed on the upper operation port display unit 33 or the lower operation port display unit 34. There is no effect on the game cycle on G. As described above, in the present embodiment, when “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, “on the display screen G” until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is finished after the open / close execution mode is finished. It is displayed that the round game preparation for extension is in progress. Here, in a state where "in preparation for the round game for an extension" is displayed on the display screen G, the variable light command and the type command are transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90 each time the holding information is digested. In the configuration, the variable display of the symbol and the reach effect are generated on the display screen G, so that even if the next round game is started, the player may seem as if the round game has been extended. It will not be possible. In this respect, according to the present configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the variation command and the type command are not transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, so the next round game is started. In the display screen G, no variation display or reach effect of the symbol occurs on the display screen G. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being unable to make it seem as if the round game has been extended when the next round game is started.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the ending period is 4 seconds, the extension standby period of the round game is 1.5 seconds at the longest, and the opening period is 2 seconds. That is, after the round game of the upper limit number of times is finished and the ending effect is generated on the display screen G, it takes up to 7.5 seconds at the beginning of the next round game. Here, as described above, the standby period between each round game is set to 1 sec. Since the player is accustomed to take 1 sec to start the next round game after the end of one round game, the next round game starts after the one round game ends If it takes 7.5 seconds before being done, the time will be felt long. In this respect, according to the present configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an image “extension of next round game” is displayed on the display screen G during the ending period, and In the extension standby period, an image of "in preparation for round game for extension" is displayed on the display screen G, and in the opening period, an image of "round game for extension for start!" Is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the player is likely to pay attention to the above-described effect different from normal. Therefore, even if it takes 7.5 seconds from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game by making the above-mentioned effect pay attention to the effect, the player does not feel that the time is long It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent that the round game can not be thought as if it has been extended.

<Time chart showing the flow of the game>
The flow of the game in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51 is a time chart showing the flow of the game, FIG. 51 (a) shows the timing when the game round corresponding to the big hit is finished, FIG. 51 (b) shows the opening period, and FIG. 51 (c) 51 shows a round game, FIG. 51 (d) shows an ending period, FIG. 51 (e) shows an extension standby period of the round game, and FIG. 51 (f) shows a game round.

  First, as shown in FIG. 51 (a) at the timing of t1, when the game round corresponding to the big hit is finished, the opening period is shown in FIG. 51 (b) from the same timing to the timing of t2. Occurs. In the opening period, an effect at the time of opening is performed on the display screen G. Specifically, a character is displayed on the display screen G, and is displayed adjacent to the character to display "round game start!". In addition, the opening period is set to 2 seconds.

  Next, from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), a round game of the first R is performed. The first round game is finished at the timing of t3, and after the waiting period (period from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4) until the next round game is started, the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 As shown in FIG. 51 (c), the second round game is played. The standby period is set to 1 sec.

  From the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 51C, a round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times is performed. Here, processing after the ending period will be described by taking as an example a case where hold information corresponding to a big hit is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb. Further, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64. When a big hit is won in the on-hold status determination process executed in the open / close execution mode, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”.

  From the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 51D, an ending period occurs. In the ending period, effects at the time of ending are executed on the display screen G. Specifically, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), “next time on the display screen G It is displayed as "extension of round game". This makes it possible for the player to think that the round game will be extended. In addition, the ending period is set to 4 seconds.

  At the timing of t8 when the ending period ends, as shown in FIG. 51 (e), the extension standby period of the round game is started. The extended standby period of the round game is displayed on the display screen G as "in preparation for the extended round game" from the end of the opening / closing execution mode until the game times corresponding to the big hit are digested. It is a period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the display screen G displays “In preparation for extension round game”. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that it is a waiting time until the extension round game is started.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, the first game round is performed after the open / close execution mode is finished. Specifically, a game play corresponding to the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The variable display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game session, the variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operation opening display unit 34, and the effect of the game session is not generated on the display screen G.

  From the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), the second game round is performed after the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, a game play corresponding to the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The variable display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game session, the variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operation opening display unit 34, and the effect of the game session is not generated on the display screen G.

  From the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), the third game round is performed after the open / close execution mode is finished. Specifically, a game play corresponding to the hold information stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The variable display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game session, the variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operation opening display unit 34, and the effect of the game session is not generated on the display screen G.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (a) at the timing of t13, when the gaming round corresponding to the big hit is finished, an opening period occurs from the same timing to the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 51 (b). Do. In the opening period, an effect at the time of opening is performed on the display screen G. Specifically, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, as shown in FIG. It is displayed that the minute round game start! This makes it possible for the player to think that the extended round game has been started. The opening period is set to 2 seconds.

  From the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), a round game of the first R is performed.

  According to the present embodiment, when “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, an image “extension of next round game” is displayed on the display screen G during the ending period, and the extension standby of the round game is performed. During the period, an image "Preparing for a round game for extension" is displayed on the display screen G, and an image "For starting a round game for extension!" Is displayed on the display screen G during the opening period. Here, in the present embodiment, the ending period is 4 seconds, the extension standby period of the round game is 1.5 seconds at the longest, and the opening period is 2 seconds. That is, after the round game of the upper limit number of times is finished and the ending effect is generated on the display screen G, it takes up to 7.5 seconds at the beginning of the next round game. As described above, since the standby period between each round game is set to 1 sec, it takes 1 sec for the player to take from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game. There is a high possibility of getting used to. If it takes 7.5 seconds from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game in that situation, the time will be felt longer. In this respect, according to the present configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an image “extension of next round game” is displayed on the display screen G during the ending period, and In the extension standby period, an image of "in preparation for round game for extension" is displayed on the display screen G, and in the opening period, an image of "round game for extension for start!" Is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the player is likely to pay attention to the above-described effect different from normal. Therefore, even if it takes 7.5 seconds from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game by making the above-mentioned effect pay attention to the effect, the player does not feel that the time is long It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent that the round game can not be thought as if it has been extended.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, in the open / close execution mode, a process of judging whether or not the acceptance information stored in the areas for suspension Ra and Rb is the target is determined. After the end of the round game corresponding to the jackpot result which has become the transition trigger to the open / close execution mode, “during the preparation of a round game for an extension” is displayed on the display screen G. Then, when the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is digested, “the start of the round game for the extension!” Is displayed on the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to make the player think as if the round game has been extended, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  A plurality of timings at which a notification effect is generated to notify that stored information to be a big hit is stored in one open / close execution mode are set. Here, in the configuration in which the in-hold propriety judgment process is performed a plurality of times in one opening / closing execution mode, if the timing at which the notification effect is generated is set to one, the player generates the notification effect. Only one timing can be excited depending on whether or not. In that respect, according to the present configuration, the notification effect may occur not only at the specific number of rounds, but also at the end of the upper limit number of round games. As a result, the chance of being able to be excited can be increased depending on whether or not the above-mentioned notification effect occurs, and it is possible to further entertain the player.

  Not only at the time of a specific number of rounds, but also at the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times, the process of judging whether or not on hold is performed. Since it is possible to obtain hold information even during a round game, new hold information is obtained from the time the on-hold propriety judgment process is performed in a specific number of rounds to the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times There is a possibility. Therefore, by configuring to perform the in-hold propriety judgment process at the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times, the hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the hold information until the end of the round game It is possible to make a player play a round game while making the player expect.

  The on-hold pass / fail judgment process may be performed multiple times with the same hold information in one open / close execution mode. Here, assuming that the in-hold propriety judgment process is performed only once in the same hold information, the hold information which is the determination target of the in-hold propriety judgment process executed in the specific number of rounds is stored in the RAM 64. Need to remember. In that respect, according to the present configuration, the in-hold propriety check processing can be executed multiple times with the same hold information in one opening / closing execution mode, so the in-hold propriety check processing performed in a specific number of rounds There is no need to store the pending information that is the target of the determination in the RAM 64. This makes it possible to prevent the capacity of the RAM 64 from becoming too large.

  If the hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 to the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is “1”. If it is set and the holding information corresponding to the big hit is included in the holding information stored in the fourth holding area Rb4 of the second holding area Rb, the holding continuation flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". Ru. When "1" is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, a notification effect is generated to notify that the on-hold information to be a big hit is stored in the open / close execution mode, and the open / close execution mode ends. Continuous effects occur as if the execution mode is continuing. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the hold continuation flag of the RAM 64, a notification effect is generated to notify that the hold information which is a big hit is stored in the open / close execution mode, but the open / close execution mode is ended. The above-mentioned continuation presentation does not occur later. Here, in the present embodiment, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the variation display time of the game times is shortened until the game times are executed three times. That is, although the variation display time of the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Rb1 to the third suspension area Rb3 of the second suspension area Rb is shortened, the change of display time of the suspension information is shortened to the fourth suspension area Rb4 of the second suspension area Rb. The fluctuation display time of the stored hold information is not shortened. Therefore, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, it takes time until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is digested. If the time until the round game is started becomes long in the situation where the above continuous effect is generated, it will not be possible for the player to think as if the round game has been extended. In that respect, according to the present configuration, when the fourth holding area Rb4 of the second holding area Rb includes the holding information corresponding to the big hit, the holding continuation flag is “1” instead of the extension flag of the RAM 64. Is set. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming unable to think as if the round game has been extended.

  Furthermore, according to the configuration, when the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb includes the hold information corresponding to the big hit, the hold continuous flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. Although the continuous effect does not occur, the notification effect occurs. Here, since the player is expecting the continuation of the open / close execution mode, if the above continuous effect is not generated, the player will be disappointed. In that respect, according to this configuration, since the notification effect is generated even in the situation where the continuous effect is not generated, it is possible to suppress a disappointing feeling that the continuous effect is not generated.

  When the first holding area Ra1 to the fourth holding area Ra4 of the first holding area Ra includes the holding information corresponding to the big hit, the holding continuation flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". Here, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information may be stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is digested. There is. In the present embodiment, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is preferentially digested prior to the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Therefore, there is a possibility that the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is digested before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is digested. As described above, in the present embodiment, after the end of the opening and closing execution mode until the game times are executed three times, the variation display time of the game times is shortened, so after the end of the opening and closing execution mode When the game is executed four times or more, the variable display time of the game game is not shortened. Therefore, when the first holding area Ra1 to the fourth holding area Ra4 of the first holding area Ra includes holding information corresponding to a big hit, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". Then, when a continuation effect occurs as if the open / close execution mode is continued after the end of the open / close execution mode, it may take time until the round game is started. In this case, it becomes impossible for the player to seem as if the round game has been extended. In that respect, according to the present configuration, when the first holding area Ra1 to the fourth holding area Ra4 of the first holding area Ra includes holding information corresponding to a big hit, the RAM 64 of the RAM 64 is selected instead of the extension flag of the RAM 64. Since “1” is set in the holding link flag, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to think as if the round game has been extended.

  If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is identified, the process of judging whether to hold or not later than the hold information is not performed. Here, even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is specified, if the acceptance decision processing is performed in the other hold information, hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the other hold information. The above-described notification effect occurs even when the user is identified, so the above-mentioned notification effect occurs a plurality of times in one opening / closing execution mode. In this case, since it is specified to the player that a plurality of pieces of suspension information to be a big hit are stored in the suspension information, the jackpot is won in the suspension information when making the player play the next opening / closing execution mode It becomes impossible to be able to be surprised whether the suspension information corresponding to is stored. In this respect, according to the present configuration, when the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot win is identified, the on / off determination process which is scheduled to be performed after the suspension information is not performed. It is not specified to the player that a plurality of are stored. As a result, when making the player play the open / close execution mode, it is possible to prevent the user from being unable to get excited about whether or not the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the hold information. Become.

  If the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode is the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the first holding area Ra is not set as the target of the on-hold propriety judgment process. If the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is the 6R probability variation big hit result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the termination of the opening / closing mode. In the case of the high frequency support mode, the probability that a winning on the lower operating port 24 occurs than the upper operating port 23 is high. Further, as described above, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is preferentially digested prior to the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Therefore, in a situation where the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R probability variation big hit result or the 16R probability variation big hit result, the first hold good or bad judgment processing is performed, but the first There is a possibility that the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra, which is the target of the suspension pass / fail determination process, is not set as an execution trigger of the game run for a long time. In that respect, according to the present embodiment, when the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode is the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the first hold success / failure determination process is not performed Therefore, it is possible to prevent the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra, which is the target of the first suspension pass / fail determination process, from becoming unset as the game opportunity execution trigger for a long period of time It becomes possible.

  After the open / close execution mode is ended, the upper limit number of times of game play is set to three, in which the variable display time is set to 0.5 seconds which is the shortest. Therefore, the variation display time is not set to be shortest after the number of times of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is four or more. Thus, when the second holding area Rb stores the holding information corresponding to the big hit, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to all the holding information from ending in a short period of time. It becomes. Further, according to the configuration, since the game play triggered by the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is executed for a long period, new hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb during that time It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation in which no hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb. Here, as described above, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is more advantageous than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. According to the configuration in which the upper limit number of game times is set to three, in which the variation display time is set to the shortest 0.5 sec after the opening / closing execution mode ends, as described above, the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb. It is less likely to disadvantage the player because it is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence of an unstored situation.

  Even if the hold information obtained until the end of the round game of the upper limit number of times does not include the hold information corresponding to the big hit, the fluctuation display time is shortest after the open / close execution mode is ended 0.5 sec Set to Here, when the notification effect notifying that the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot win is not generated, the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot win is not included in the acquired suspension information. Is identified by the player. In this case, it is necessary for the player to digest the game times specified not to be a jackpot winning. In that respect, according to this configuration, even if the hold information acquired after the end of the open / close execution mode does not include the hold information corresponding to the big hit, the fluctuation display time is shortest after the end of the open / close execution mode Is set to 0.5 sec. As a result, it is possible to prevent accumulation of frustration for having to wait for a long time until the game times specified to be not winning jackpots are digested.

  When “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, an image “extension of next round game” is displayed on the display screen G in the ending period, and on the display screen G in the extension standby period of the round game. Then, an image of "in preparation for the round game for extension" is displayed, and an image for "the start of round game for the extension!" Is displayed on the display screen G in the opening period. Here, in the present embodiment, the ending period is 4 seconds, the extension standby period of the round game is 1.5 seconds at the longest, and the opening period is 2 seconds. That is, after the round game of the upper limit number of times is finished and the ending effect is generated on the display screen G, it takes up to 7.5 seconds at the beginning of the next round game. As described above, since the standby period between each round game is set to 1 sec, it takes 1 sec for the player to take from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game. There is a high possibility of getting used to. If it takes 7.5 seconds from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game in that situation, the time will be felt longer. In this respect, according to the present configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an image “extension of next round game” is displayed on the display screen G during the ending period, and In the extension standby period, an image of "in preparation for round game for extension" is displayed on the display screen G, and in the opening period, an image of "round game for extension for start!" Is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the player is likely to pay attention to the above-described effect different from normal. Therefore, even if it takes 7.5 seconds from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game by making the above-mentioned effect pay attention to the effect, the player does not feel that the time is long It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent that the round game can not be thought as if it has been extended.

  When “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, the game rotation on the display screen G is performed even if the variation display of the pattern is performed on the upper operation port display unit 33 or the lower operation port display unit 34. There is no production for As described above, in the present embodiment, when “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, “on the display screen G” until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is finished after the open / close execution mode is finished. It is displayed that the round game preparation for extension is in progress. Here, in a state where "in preparation for the round game for an extension" is displayed on the display screen G, the variable light command and the type command are transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90 each time the holding information is digested. In the configuration, the variable display of the symbol and the reach effect are generated on the display screen G, so that even if the next round game is started, the player may seem as if the round game has been extended. It will not be possible. In this respect, according to the present configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the variation command and the type command are not transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, so the next round game is started. In the display screen G, no variation display or reach effect of the symbol occurs on the display screen G. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being unable to make it seem as if the round game has been extended when the next round game is started.

Sixth Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in the handling of the hold information acquired in the open / close execution mode. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Second hold pass / fail judgment processing>
The second hold pass / fail judgment process executed in step S2902 in the hold / non-pending process (FIG. 40) will be described with reference to FIG. The said 2nd reservation success / failure determination process is a process for performing the presence / absence determination process which made the object the pending | holding information stored in 2nd storage area Rb in open / close execution mode. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the second hold acceptance decision processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3701, a success or failure determination process is executed. Specifically, first, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. In the success or failure determination process executed in step S3701, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Rb1 of the second reserve area Rb is grasped.

  Next, when the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Determine if it is included in the value.

  On the other hand, when the 6R probability variation big hit flag or the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the value of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponds to the big hit winning with reference to the pass / fail table for high probability mode. It is determined whether or not it is included in.

  If the result of the success or failure judgment processing executed in step S3701 is a big hit (step S3702: YES), the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” in step S3703, and the second hold suitability judgment is made. End the process. As described above, the extension flag is used to specify whether or not the continuation effect is to be generated as if the open / close execution mode continues after the end of the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a flag. The continuous effect is an effect that is displayed on the display screen G as “in preparation for a round game for an extended period” until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is digested.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3702, it is determined in step S3704 whether or not the second starting reserved ball number NB is larger than "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3704, the second suspension acceptance decision processing is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3704, the processing of step S3705 to step S3707 is executed. The process of the said step S3705-step S3707 is the same as the process of step S3701-step S3703. However, the second holding area Rb2 of the second holding area Rb is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3705.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3706, it is determined in step S3708 whether the second starting pending ball number NB is larger than "2". If a negative determination is made in step S3708, the second suspension status acceptance determination process is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3708, the processes of steps S3709 to S3711 are executed. The process of the said step S3709-step S3711 is the same as the process of step S3701-step S3703. However, the third holding area Rb3 of the second holding area Rb is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3709.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3710, it is determined in step S3712 whether the second starting pending ball number NB is larger than "3". If a negative determination is made in step S3712, the second suspension status acceptance determination process is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, the processes of steps S3713 to S3715 are executed. The process of the said step S3713-step S3715 is the same as the process of step S3701-step S3703. However, the fourth holding area Rb4 of the second holding area Rb is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3713.

  In the present embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb after the open / close execution mode is ended, “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 . When “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, an effect of “Preparing for a round game for extension” is generated on the display screen G, and the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning is digested. A round game is started by doing. Here, when the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the suspension, the display on the display screen G is more than the configuration in which the variable display of the symbol occurs on the display screen G when the suspension information is digested. It is more likely that the player's feeling of excitement will be higher if the system displays "In preparation for the round game for extension" and does not generate the variable display of the symbol. Therefore, when the hold information acquired in the opening / closing execution mode includes the hold information corresponding to the big hit, the display screen G displays “under preparation for the round game for an extension”, and the symbol It is possible to enhance the player's sense of excitement by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of is not generated.

<First hold pass / fail judgment processing>
Next, the first hold success / failure determination process executed in step S2906 of the hold status success / failure determination process (FIG. 40) will be described with reference to FIG. The first suspension pass / fail judgment process is a process for performing a pass / fail decision process targeting the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra in the opening / closing execution mode. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the first hold acceptance decision processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3801, a success or failure determination process is executed. Specifically, first, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. In the success / failure determination process executed in step S3801, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra1 of the first holding area Ra is grasped.

  Next, when the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Determine if it is included in the value.

  On the other hand, when the 6R probability variation big hit flag or the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the value of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponds to the big hit winning with reference to the pass / fail table for high probability mode. It is determined whether or not it is included in.

  If the result of the success or failure judgment processing executed in step S3801 is a big hit (step S3802: YES), the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” in step S3803, and the first hold success / failure judgment End the process. As described above, the extension flag is used to specify whether or not the continuation effect is to be generated as if the open / close execution mode continues after the end of the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3802, it is determined in step S3804 whether or not the first start-holding ball number NA is larger than "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3804, the first suspension acceptance decision processing is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3804, the processing of step S3805 to step S3807 is executed. The process of the said step S3805-step S3807 is the same as the process of step S3801-step S3803. However, the second holding area Ra2 of the first holding area Ra is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3805.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3806, it is determined in step S3808 whether or not the first starting reserved ball number NA is larger than "2". If a negative determination is made in step S3808, the present first hold yes / no determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3808, the processes of steps S3809 to S3811 are executed. The process of the said step S3809-step S3811 is the same as the process of step S3801-step S3803. However, the third holding area Ra3 of the first holding area Ra is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S3809.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3810, it is determined in step S3812 whether or not the first starting reserved ball number NA is larger than "3". If a negative determination is made in step S3812, the first suspension acceptance decision processing is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3812, the processes of steps S3813 to S3815 are performed. The process of the said step S3813-step S3815 is the same as the process of step S3801-step S3803. However, in the acceptance determination process executed in step S3813, the fourth suspension area Ra4 of the first suspension area Ra is targeted.

  In the present embodiment, when the first holding area Ra includes the holding information corresponding to the big hit, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. When “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, an effect of “Preparing for a round game for extension” is generated on the display screen G, and the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning is digested. A round game is started by doing. Here, although the details will be described later, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is included at the end of the open / close execution mode, the fluctuation display time is set to the shortest until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is digested. Be done. In addition, when the hold information is newly stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is digested, the second hold area Rb is stored. Since the stored information stored in the first storage area Ra is preferentially stored over the storage information stored in the first storage area Ra, it corresponds to the jackpot winning stored in the first storage area Ra. It may take too long for the pending information to be digested. In this respect, according to this configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is included at the end of the open / close execution mode, the fluctuation display time is set to the shortest until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is digested. Therefore, even if the hold information is newly stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is digested, the first hold is It does not take too long for the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the area Ra to be digested. As a result, even in a situation where the first hold area Ra includes hold information corresponding to a big hit, it is possible to set an effect as if the round game has been extended.

  Here, in a situation where the first hold area Ra stores hold information corresponding to a big hit in the open / close execution mode, the hold information corresponding to the big hit in the first hold area Ra is digested. Before being played, holding information corresponding to a big hit was stored in the second holding area Rb, and a round game was started triggered by the holding information corresponding to the big hit held in the second holding area Rb. Also in the case, on the display screen G, “Extended round game start!” Is displayed. Therefore, even if a round game is not performed triggered by the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra, it is possible to make the player think that the extended round game has been started. Become.

<Various display time related processing>
The variation display time related process executed in step S3512 of the variation start process (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to FIG. The said fluctuation | variation display time related process is a process performed in order to set the fluctuation | variation display time of the pattern in the display part 33 for upper operating ports and the display part 34 for lower operating ports. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the variable display time related process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3901, it is determined whether "1" is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 or not. As described above, the extension flag is for specifying whether or not the continuation effect is to be generated as if the open / close execution mode continues after the end of the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a flag. Only when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the variable display time is set to the shortest. Therefore, by providing the process of step S3901, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display time from being set to the shortest in the situation where "1" is not set in the extension flag of the RAM 64.

  In the present embodiment, after the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs and the round game extension start command is set, the extension flag is cleared to “0”. The above-mentioned round game extension start command is a command for making the voice light emission control device 90 specify that the opening effect corresponding to the case where the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. The above-mentioned opening effect is an effect that is displayed on the display screen G as "the start of the round game for an extension!" The opening effect corresponding to the case where the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" by clearing the extension flag to "0" at the timing when the setting of the round game extension start command is finished may be generated. As well as being possible, when the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit is specified in the on-hold propriety determination process, it is possible to set the extension flag to “1” again.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3901, "250" is set as the shortest fluctuation display time in the fluctuation display time counters provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S3902, and this fluctuation display time related process is ended. Do. The numerical information set in the variable display time counter is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, the shortest variation display time is set to 0.5 sec. However, it is not limited that the shortest of the variation display time is 0.5 sec, and a period from displaying “under preparation for round game” on the display screen G to starting of the next round game If the player is considered not to feel long, the shortest variation display time is optional. Further, the numerical information set in the variable display time counter in step S3902 is not limited to the shortest configuration among the variable display times set in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, It is optional as long as the player does not feel as long as the period from the display on the display screen G as "in preparation for round game" to the start of the next round game.

  If the negative determination is made in step S3901, the setting process of the variable display time is executed in step S3903, and the variable display time related process is ended. In the setting process of the fluctuation display time, numerical information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set in the fluctuation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

According to the present embodiment, the variation display time is set to the shortest only when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the hold at the end of the open / close execution mode. Here, assuming that the variation display time is set to the shortest even in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not stored in the hold at the end of the open / close execution mode, the game cycle is executed in that situation. Since the stop symbol is displayed on the display screen G on the screen G, the player is specified that the game play can be digested in the shortest time. In this case, even if it takes a short time for the next round game to be started after displaying the image "In preparation for the round game for an extension" on the display screen G, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is made. There is a possibility that the next round game is considered to have been started since was digested. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the variation display time is set to the shortest only when the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the suspension at the end of the open / close execution mode, so the game time is the shortest It is not specified to the player that it can be digested in the time of. As a result, even if it takes a short time for the next round game to be started after displaying the image "Preparing for a round game for an extension" on the display screen G, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win Since it is digested, it is possible to prevent the next round game from being considered started.

<Time chart showing the flow of the game>
The flow of the game in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a time chart showing the flow of the game, FIG. 55 (a) shows the timing when the game round corresponding to the big hit is finished, FIG. 55 (b) shows the opening period, and FIG. 55 (c) A round game is shown, FIG. 55 (d) shows an ending period, FIG. 55 (e) shows an extension standby period of the round game, and FIG. 55 (f) shows a game time.

  First, as shown in FIG. 55 (a) at the timing of t1, when the game round corresponding to the big hit is finished, the opening period is shown in FIG. 55 (b) from the same timing to the timing of t2. Occurs. In the opening period, an effect at the time of opening is performed on the display screen G. Specifically, a character is displayed on the display screen G, and is displayed adjacent to the character to display "round game start!". In addition, the opening period is set to 2 seconds.

  Next, from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), a round game of the first R is performed. The first round game is finished at the timing of t3, and after the waiting period (period from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4) until the next round game is started, the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the second round game is played. The standby period is set to 1 sec.

  From the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times is performed. Here, processing after the ending period will be described by taking, as an example, a case where hold information corresponding to a big hit is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb. Further, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, "1" is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64. When a big hit is won in the on-hold status determination process executed in the open / close execution mode, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”.

  From the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), an ending period occurs. In the ending period, effects at the time of ending are executed on the display screen G. Specifically, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), “next time on the display screen G It is displayed as "extension of round game". This makes it possible for the player to think that the round game will be extended. In addition, the ending period is set to 4 seconds.

  At the timing of t8 when the ending period is over, as shown in FIG. 55 (e), the extension standby period of the round game is started. The extended standby period of the round game is displayed on the display screen G as "in preparation for the extended round game" from the end of the opening / closing execution mode until the game times corresponding to the big hit are digested. It is a period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the display screen G displays “In preparation for extension round game”. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that it is a waiting time until the extension round game is started.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, the first game round is performed after the open / close execution mode is finished. Specifically, a game play corresponding to the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The variable display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game session, the variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operation opening display unit 34, and the effect of the game session is not generated on the display screen G.

  From the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the second game round is performed after the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, a game play corresponding to the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The variable display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game session, the variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operation opening display unit 34, and the effect of the game session is not generated on the display screen G.

  From the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the third game round is performed after the open / close execution mode is finished. Specifically, a game play corresponding to the hold information stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The variable display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game session, the variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operation opening display unit 34, and the effect of the game session is not generated on the display screen G.

  From the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the fourth game round is performed after the open / close execution mode is finished. Specifically, a game play corresponding to the hold information stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The variable display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec.

  In the present embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode, the variation display time of the game time is 0.5 sec until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is digested. Set to Therefore, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, “Extending round game preparation on the display screen G at the end of the open / close execution mode Even if it is displayed as "Medium", the time required for the next round game to be started after the image is displayed is not too long, so it can not be thought as if the round game was extended. It is possible to prevent the As a result, it is possible to increase the situation in which an effect is generated as if the round game was extended.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the first hold area Ra stores hold information corresponding to a big hit, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. Since the variation display time of the game is set to 0.5 sec until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the first hold area Ra, it is temporarily stored in the first hold area Ra. Even if the hold information is newly stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the hit jackpot is won, the hold corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra It will not be too long for the information to be digested. As a result, even in a situation where the first hold area Ra includes hold information corresponding to a big hit, it is possible to set an effect as if the round game has been extended.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a) at the timing of t15, when the gaming round corresponding to the big hit is finished, an opening period occurs from the same timing to the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 55 (b). Do. In the opening period, an effect at the time of opening is performed on the display screen G. Specifically, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, as shown in FIG. It is displayed that the minute round game start! This makes it possible for the player to think that the extended round game has been started. The opening period is set to 2 seconds.

  Next, from the timing of t16 to the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), a round game of the first R is performed.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb at the end of the open / close execution mode, “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64. Is set. When “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, an effect of “Preparing for a round game for extension” is generated on the display screen G, and the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning is digested. A round game is started by doing. Here, when the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the suspension, the variation of the symbol is generated rather than the configuration in which the fluctuation display of the symbol occurs on the display screen G when the suspension information is digested. If the display is not generated, the player's sense of excitement is likely to be high. Therefore, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the hold at the end of the open / close execution mode, “in preparation for round game” is displayed on the display screen G, and the variable display of the symbol is not generated. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of excitement.

  If the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the hold at the end of the open / close execution mode, the variable display time is set to the shortest until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is digested. Here, if the hold information is newly stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the first hold area Ra, the second hold area Rb is stored. Since the method of holding information stored in is preferentially digested over the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra, the jackpot is won in the first holding area Ra. It may take too long for the corresponding pending information to be digested. In this respect, according to the present configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the hold at the end of the open / close execution mode, the variable display time is taken until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is digested. Since the shortest setting is made, even if the hold information is newly stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is digested, The time until the reserve information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first reserve area Ra will not be digested will not be too long. Thereby, even in a situation where the first hold area Ra stores hold information corresponding to a big hit, it is possible to set an effect as if the round game has been extended.

  The variable display time is set to be shortest only when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the hold at the end of the open / close execution mode. Here, assuming that the variation display time is set to the shortest even in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not stored in the hold at the end of the open / close execution mode, the game cycle is executed in that situation. Since the stop symbol is displayed on the display screen G on the screen G, the player is specified that the game play can be digested in the shortest time. In this case, even if it takes a short time for the next round game to be started after displaying the image "In preparation for the round game for an extension" on the display screen G, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is made. There is a possibility that the next round game is considered to have been started since was digested. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the variation display time is set to the shortest only when the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the suspension at the end of the open / close execution mode, so the game time is the shortest It is not specified to the player that it can be digested in the time of. As a result, even if it takes a short time for the next round game to be started after displaying the image "Preparing for a round game for an extension" on the display screen G, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win Since it is digested, it is possible to prevent the next round game from being considered started.

Another Example of Sixth Embodiment
(1) The extension flag of the RAM 64 may be set to “1” only when the second suspension area Rb stores the suspension information corresponding to the big hit. Further, in the configuration, when the first hold area Ra stores hold information corresponding to a big hit, the hold series flag of the RAM 64 may be set to “1”. The said pending connection flag is a flag for specifying whether the effect | action which alert | reports that the pending | holding information corresponding to big hit is contained in pending | holding in MPU62 of the main control apparatus 60 is generated. When “1” is set in the hold combination flag, it is informed on the display screen G that hold information corresponding to a big hit is included in the hold. Further, when the pending link flag is set to "1", the variable display time is not set to the shortest value, and a numerical value corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. Information is set in a variable display time counter provided in various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64. In addition, in the game run in the case where “1” is set in the hold continuation flag of the RAM 64, an effect for the game run is executed on the display screen G. The effect for the said game circulation is an effect by which the fluctuation display of a symbol is performed until fluctuation display time passes. If the variation display time has elapsed, the stop symbol is displayed. The variation display of symbols is started in the game round where reach effect occurs, and the stop symbol is displayed after reach effect occurs. On the other hand, if “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, “In preparation for the round game for extension” will be displayed on the display screen G until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is digested. . According to the hold areas Ra and Rb in which the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored, the type of the effect is made different by configuring the effect until the hold information corresponding to the big hit is digested. It is possible to increase the This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect.

  (2) The variation display time may be set to be shortest even when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not stored at the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the variable display time of the holding information which is the determination target of the pending / non-presence propriety determination process may be set to be shortest. Here, in the open / close execution mode, when the notification effect notifying that the hold information to be a big hit is stored does not occur, the player is notified that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not stored in the hold. It will be identified. In this case, it is necessary for the player to digest the game times specified to not win the jackpot. In that respect, according to the present configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not stored at the end of the open / close execution mode, the fluctuation display time of the hold information which is the judgment target of the in-hold propriety judgment process is shortest It is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent accumulation of frustration for having to wait for a long time until the game times specified to be not winning jackpots are digested.

Seventh Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in the method of setting the opening period and the ending period. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Playing state transition processing>
The gaming state transition processing executed in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the seventh embodiment.

  First, the process of steps S4001 to S4004 is the same as the process of steps S2601 to S2604.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S4004, in step S4005, "6" is set to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. If a negative determination is made in step S4004, in step S4006, "16" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  If the process of step S4005 is performed, or if the process of step S4006 is performed, it is determined in step S4007 whether "1" is set in any of the extension flags of the RAM 64 or not. In the present embodiment, the RAM 64 is provided with a first extension flag, a second extension flag, and a third extension flag. The first extension flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the big hit in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb. . The second extension flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the big hit in the second hold area R2 of the second hold area Rb. . The third extension flag is a flag for specifying that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. . In the present embodiment, a method of setting the opening period and the ending period in the case where “1” is set in any of the above extension flags and in the case where “1” is not set in any of the above extension flags. Is different. Therefore, by providing the process of step S4007, it becomes possible to set the opening period according to the situation.

  Further, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the case where the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored is stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb, and the second hold area Rb The opening period is stored in the case where the holding information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the holding area Rb2 and in the case where the holding information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the third holding area Rb3 of the second holding area Rb. The ending period is different. Therefore, by using the above three types of flags, it is possible to set the opening period and the ending period corresponding to the flags.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4007, "1000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4008 as a standby period for opening. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, the waiting period for opening is 2 seconds. However, the waiting period is optional.

  In the subsequent step S4009, an opening command is set, and the game state transition processing is ended. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes setting processing of effects for the open / close execution mode. The light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the open / close execution mode is performed according to the set effect pattern, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed.

  Next, the sound emission control apparatus 90 transmits to the display control apparatus 100 an open / close execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the setting process of the effect for the open / close execution mode. Thereby, the effect at the time of opening in the case where "1" is not set to any of the extension flags on the display screen G is executed. Specifically, a character is displayed on the display screen G, and it is displayed adjacent to the character to display "round game start!". This makes it possible for the player to easily identify that the round game is to be started.

  The process (steps S4020 to S4022) in the case where the positive determination is made in step S4007 will be described later.

  If the positive determination is made in step S4001, the special winning opening / closing process is executed in step S4010. In the special winning opening / closing process, when the special winning opening 22a is closed, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is provided in the various counter areas 64b of "1" or more and the RAM 64. Under the condition that the timer counter T is "0", the special winning opening 22a is opened by setting the variable winning device 22 in the driving state.

  When the special winning opening 22a is open, a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 22a (the timer counter T is "0") or a predetermined number of gaming balls are winning. Under the condition that the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0", the drive state of the variable winning device 22 is stopped, and the special winning opening 22a is closed. After the processing for closing the special winning opening 22a is executed, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is decremented by one. When the value of the round counter RC decremented by 1 becomes a specific value (when it becomes the specific number of rounds), the notification identification process is executed. The notification specifying process is a process for specifying whether to generate a notification effect in a round game. The notification effect is an effect for notifying that the held information corresponding to the big hit is included in the acquired held information.

  In the notification identification process, an on-hold pass / fail determination process is performed to identify that the obtained suspension information includes suspension information corresponding to a big hit. In the on-hold propriety judgment process, a first on-hold propriety judgment process and a second on-hold propriety judgment process are performed. The first suspension pass / fail judgment process is a process for performing a pass / fail decision process for the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra in the open / close execution mode. The above-mentioned second suspension pass / fail judgment process is a process for performing a pass / fail decision process targeting the suspension information stored in the second suspension area Rb in the open / close execution mode.

  Specifically, in the above-mentioned pending / non-pending status determination process, when the second starting pending number of balls NB is not “0”, the above-described second above-mentioned running status determination process is executed. The specific processing contents of the second hold pass / fail judgment process will be described later. In the second hold availability judgment process, it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not stored in the second hold area Rb, the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the current opening and closing execution mode If the type of 6R normal jackpot result or 16R normal jackpot result and the first starting hold ball number NA is larger than “0”, the first hold acceptance judgment process is executed. The specific processing content of the first hold success / failure determination process is the same as the process of step S2906.

  In addition, the second start pending ball number NB is "0", the type of jackpot result that became the transition trigger to the opening and closing execution mode this time is 6R normal big hit result or 16R normal big hit result and first start pending ball number NA Is larger than “0”, the first hold pass / fail determination process is executed.

  The second hold success / failure determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the second holding success / failure determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S4101, a success or failure determination process is executed. Specifically, first, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. In the success or failure determination process executed in step S4101, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Rb1 of the second reserve area Rb is grasped.

  Next, when the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Determine if it is included in the value.

  On the other hand, when the 6R probability variation big hit flag or the 16R probability variation big hit flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the value of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponds to the big hit winning with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. It is determined whether or not it is included in.

  If the result of the success or failure judgment processing executed in step S4101 is a big hit (step S4102: YES), the first extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S4103, and this is for the second hold The success or failure determination process is ended. As described above, with the first extension flag, it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a flag for

  If a negative determination is made in step S4102, it is determined in step S4104 whether or not the second starting reserved ball number NB is larger than "1". If a negative determination is made in step S4104, the second suspension acceptance decision processing is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4104, the process of step S4105 is executed. The process of step S4105 is similar to the process of step S4101. However, the second holding area Rb2 of the second holding area Rb is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S4105.

  If the result of the success or failure judgment processing executed in step S4105 is a big hit (step S4106: YES), the second extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” in step S4107, and the second hold success or failure is given. The determination process ends. As described above, with the second extension flag, it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a flag for

  If a negative determination is made in step S4106, it is determined in step S4108 whether or not the second starting reserved ball number NB is larger than "2". If a negative determination is made in step S4108, the second suspension status acceptance determination process is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4108, the process of step S4109 is executed. The process of step S4109 is the same as the process of step S4101. However, the third holding area Rb3 of the second holding area Rb is targeted in the success or failure determination process executed in step S4109.

  If the result of the success or failure judgment processing executed in step S4109 is a big hit (step S4110: YES), the third extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” in step S4111, and the second hold success or failure is given. The determination process ends. As described above, the third extension flag specifies that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a flag for

  If a negative determination is made in step S4110, the processes of step S4112 to step S4115 are executed. The process of the said step S4112-step S4115 is the same as the process of step S3012-step S3015.

  Returning to the explanation of the special winning opening / closing process executed in step S4010 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 56), after executing the notification specifying process, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 Set "1000". The numerical information set in the timer counter T is numerical information for the opening standby until the variable winning device 22 changes from the opening state to the closing state and subsequently to the opening state again, and in this embodiment, 2 sec is set. Be done. However, the waiting period between each round game is not limited to 2 seconds and is arbitrary.

  Also, when the round counter RC decremented by 1 becomes “0”, the ending process is executed. The ending process is a process performed when the round game of the upper limit number of times is finished. The ending process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the ending process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether "1" is set in any one of the extension flag or the hold combination flag. In this embodiment, if it is not possible to specify the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit in the on-hold in-progress determination process performed in the specific number of rounds, the on-off in-progress determination process is performed again at the end of the round game. . Therefore, by providing the process of step S4201, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is specified in the hold in place hold determination process performed in the specific number of rounds, the hold in place hold determination process is performed again. It is possible to prevent the

  If a negative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the first starting holding ball number NA and the second starting holding ball number NB are "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4202, a process of determining whether or not on hold is performed is performed in step S4203. The on-hold status determination process is a process for specifying whether or not the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the obtained on-hold information. As described above, in the on-hold propriety judgment process, the second on-hold propriety judgment process is executed when the second starting hold ball number NB is not “0”. In the second hold availability judgment process, it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not stored in the second hold area Rb, the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the current opening and closing execution mode If the type of 6R normal jackpot result or 16R normal jackpot result and the first starting hold ball number NA is larger than “0”, the first hold acceptance judgment process is executed.

  In addition, the second start pending ball number NB is "0", the type of jackpot result that became the transition trigger to the opening and closing execution mode this time is 6R normal big hit result or 16R normal big hit result and first start pending ball number NA Is larger than “0”, the first hold pass / fail determination process is executed.

  In the following step S4204, it is determined whether "1" is set in any of the extension flags or the pending link flag. If the determination in step S4202 is affirmative, or if the determination in step S4204 is negative, "2000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4205. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, the waiting period for ending is 4 seconds. However, the waiting period is optional.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202 or if the process of step S4205 is executed, a normal ending command is set in step S4206, and the present ending process is ended. The normal ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the voice emission control device 90 has received the normal ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the audio light emission control device 90 executes normal ending correspondence processing. In the normal ending correspondence process, first, light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 at the time of normal ending is performed, and output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed.

Next, the content of the success / failure lottery result included in the normal ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the content of the normal ending effect corresponding to the content of the success / failure lottery result is executed. After executing the normal ending correspondence processing, the normal ending command corresponding to the processing result of the normal ending correspondence processing is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.
Thus, the normal ending effect is performed on the display screen G. Specifically, in the above-mentioned normal ending effect when the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", "Matsune" is displayed on the display screen G, and the 6R of the RAM 64 is displayed. In the above-mentioned normal ending effect when the definite variation big hit flag or the 16R true variation big hit flag is set to “1”, “another one” is displayed on the display screen G.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S4204, it is determined in step S4207 whether "1" is set in any of the extension flags. In the present embodiment, the ending effect and the ending period are different in the case where “1” is set in any one of the extension flags and in the case where “1” is set in the holding continuation flag. Therefore, by providing the process of step S4207, it becomes possible to set an ending effect and an ending period corresponding to the case where "1" is set in any of the flags.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4207, an ending period setting process is executed in step S4208. The ending period setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The ending period setting process is a process for setting an ending period according to the extension flag in which “1” is set. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb, and in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb. The ending period differs between the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored and the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb. . FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an ending period setting process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S4301, it is determined whether "1" is set in the first extension flag of the RAM 64 or not. As described above, with the first extension flag, it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a flag for

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S4301, "400" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4302, and the ending period setting process is ended. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, when the first extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the waiting period for ending is 0.8 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4301, it is determined in step S4303 whether "1" is set in the second extension flag of the RAM 64 or not. The second extension flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the big hit in the second hold area R2 of the second hold area Rb. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4303, "250" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4304, and the ending period setting process is ended. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, when the second extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the waiting period for ending is 0.5 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4303, "150" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4305, and the ending period setting process is ended. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, when the third extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the waiting period for ending is 0.3 sec.

  Returning to the description of the ending process (FIG. 58), when the process of step S4208 is executed, the first special ending command is set in step S4209, and this ending process is ended. The first special ending command includes information of an extension flag in which “1” is set among various extension flags. The first special ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the voice emission control device 90 receives the first special ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 executes a first special ending handling process. In the first special ending corresponding process, first, light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 at the time of the first special ending is performed, and output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed.

  Next, the content of the first ending effect corresponding to the first special ending command received this time is determined. After the first special ending corresponding process is executed, the first special ending command corresponding to the processing result of the first special ending corresponding process is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. As a result, the first special ending effect is executed on the display screen G only during the period according to the extension flag in which “1” is set. The first special ending effect is an effect that is specifically displayed as “extension of next round game” on the display screen G. This makes it possible for the player to think that the round game will be extended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4207, "2000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4210, and a second special ending command is set in the subsequent step S4211, End the ending process. The second special ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). When the voice emission control device 90 receives the second special ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 executes a second special ending handling process. In the second special ending corresponding process, first, light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 at the time of the first special ending is performed, and output control of the speaker unit 55 is performed.

  Next, the content of the second ending effect corresponding to the second special ending command received this time is determined. After the second special ending corresponding process is executed, the second special ending command corresponding to the processing result of the second special ending corresponding process is transmitted to the display control device 100. Thereby, the second special ending effect is performed on the display screen G. The second special ending effect is an effect that is specifically displayed on the display screen G as “next holding group”. As a result, it is possible to easily notify that the suspension information acquired by the player includes suspension information corresponding to the big hit.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 56), after the process of step S4010 is performed, the processes of step S4011 to step S4013 are performed. The process of the said step S4011-step S4013 is the same as the process of step S2610-step S2612.

  If the process of step S4013 has been executed, it is determined in step S4014 whether "1" is set in any one of the extension flags. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4014, a round game extension standby command is set in step S4015. The round game extension standby command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the voice emission control device 90 transitions to the extension standby period of the round game after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Is recognized.

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the above-mentioned round game extension standby command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes the emission control of the display lamp portion 54 corresponding to the round game extension standby command. Execute output control of. Next, the above-mentioned round game extension standby command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as it is. Thereby, the effect for the extension standby period of the round game is executed on the display screen G. Specifically, on the display screen G, “In preparation for round game for extension” is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that it is a waiting time until the extension round game is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4014, the processes of steps S4016 to S4017 are executed. The process of step S4016 to step S4017 is the same as the process of step S2615 to step S2616. When the process of step S4015 is executed, the determination of step S4016 is negative, or the process of step S4017 is executed, the processes of step S4018 to step S4019 are executed. The process of the said step S4018-step S4019 is the same as the process of step S2617-step S2618.

  Next, the process (the process of step S4020 to step S4022) performed when the positive determination is made in step S4007 will be described.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, an opening period setting process is executed in step S4020. The opening period setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The opening period setting process is a process for setting an opening period according to the extension flag for which “1” is set. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb, and in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb. The opening period differs between the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored and the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb. . FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an opening period setting process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S4401, it is determined whether "1" is set in the first extension flag of the RAM 64 or not. As described above, with the first extension flag, it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a flag for

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, "350" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4402, and the opening period setting process is ended. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, when the first extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the waiting period for opening is 0.7 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4401, it is determined in step S4403 whether "1" is set in the second extension flag of the RAM 64 or not. The second extension flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the big hit in the second hold area R2 of the second hold area Rb. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, "250" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4404, and the opening period setting process is ended. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, when the second extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the waiting period for opening is 0.5 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4403, "100" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4405, and the opening period setting process is ended. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. Therefore, when the third extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the waiting period for opening is 0.2 sec.

  Here, when “1” is set in the first extension flag of the RAM 64, the ending period is 0.8 sec and the opening period is 0.7 sec. When “1” is set in the first extension flag of the RAM 64, the extension standby period of the round game is 0.5 sec. The extended standby period of the round game is displayed on the display screen G as "in preparation for the extended round game" from the end of the opening / closing execution mode until the game times corresponding to the big hit are digested. It is a period. The extension standby period of the round game is 0.5 sec, which means that the time from the end of the open / close execution mode to the game cycle corresponding to the big hit is digested is 0.5 sec. When “1” is set in the first extension flag of the RAM 64, the total of the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game, and the opening period is 2 seconds.

  When the second extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the ending period is 0.5 sec and the opening period is 0.5 sec. When "1" is set in the second extension flag of the RAM 64, the extension standby period of the round game is 1 sec. When “1” is set in the second extension flag of the RAM 64, the total time of the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game, and the opening period is 2 seconds.

  When the third extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the ending period is 0.3 sec and the opening period is 0.2 sec. When "1" is set in the third extension flag of the RAM 64, the extension standby period of the round game is 1.5 sec. When the third extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the total of the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game, and the opening period is 2 seconds.

  According to the present embodiment, when “1” is set in any of the extension flags, the total of the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game, and the opening period is the standby period between each round game and It becomes the same. Here, if the total time is not the same as the waiting period in each round game, the time from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game will be uncomfortable. there is a possibility. In that respect, according to the present configuration, the total time of the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game, and the opening period is the same as the standby period between each round game. Thus, when the round game is started after the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game and the opening period have passed, it is said that the round game is started by the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning being digested. It is possible to prevent the player from being identified.

  The ending period and the opening period differ depending on the type of the extension flag in which "1" is set. According to the configuration, even if the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in any of the first hold area Rb1 to the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, the ending period and the extension of the round game It is possible to set the total time of the waiting period and the opening period to be the same as the waiting period in each round game.

  However, when “1” is set in the first extension flag of the RAM 64, the ending period is 0.8 sec, and the opening period is not limited to 0.7 sec. The ending period and the opening period are optional, as long as the total time of the extended waiting period (0.5 sec) of and the opening period is the same as the waiting period in each round game.

  Also, when the second extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the ending period is 0.5 sec, and the opening period is not limited to 0.5 sec, and the ending period, round game The ending period and the opening period are optional, as long as the total time of the extended standby period (1 sec) and the opening period is the same as the standby period in each round game.

  Also, when the third extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the ending period is 0.3 sec, and the opening period is not limited to 0.2 sec, and the ending period, round game The ending period and the opening period are arbitrary, as long as the total time of the extended waiting period (1.5 sec) of and the opening period is the same as the waiting period in each round game.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 56), when the process of step S4020 is executed, a round game extension start command is set in step S4021. The said round game extension start command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 by step S401 in a normal process (FIG. 12).

When the sound emission control device 90 receives the round game extension start command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes the light emission control of the display lamp portion 54 corresponding to the round game extension start command. Execute output control of. Next, the above-mentioned round game extension start command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as it is. By this,
The effect for the open / close execution mode for the extension is executed on the display screen G only during the period according to the extension flag in which “1” is set. Specifically, on the display screen G, “Extended round game start!” Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to think that the extended round game has been started.

  In the following step S4022, the extension flag in which "1" is set is cleared to "0", and the game state transition processing is ended.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, when “1” is set in any of the extension flags, the total of the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game, and the opening period is the standby period between each round game and It becomes the same. Here, if the total time is not the same as the waiting period in each round game, the time from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game will be uncomfortable. there is a possibility. In that respect, according to the present configuration, the total time of the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game, and the opening period is the same as the standby period between each round game. Thus, when the round game is started after the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game and the opening period have passed, it is said that the round game is started by the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning being digested. It is possible to prevent the player from being identified.

  The ending period and the opening period differ depending on the type of the extension flag in which "1" is set. According to the configuration, even if the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in any of the first hold area Rb1 to the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, the ending period and the extension of the round game It is possible to set the total time of the waiting period and the opening period to be the same as the waiting period in each round game.

Another Example of the Seventh Embodiment
(1) Depending on the type of the extension flag in which “1” is set, the effect of the ending period, the effect of the opening period, and the effect of the extension standby period of the round game may be different. According to the configuration, it is possible to shorten the total time of the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game, and the opening period, and to increase the degree of attention to the effects in the respective periods.

  (2) Only when one of the extension flags is set to “1”, there is no limitation to the configuration in which the opening period and the ending period are shortened. Even when set, the opening period and the ending period may be shortened. Here, when “1” is set in the hold series flag of the RAM 64, it is informed that hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the hold during the open / close execution mode. A player who specifies that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the hold is highly likely to want the hold information to be quickly digested. Therefore, according to the present configuration, when “1” is set in the hold continuation flag of the RAM 64, the opening period and the ending period are shortened, and it is desired to quickly digest the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning. It is possible to provide a game that meets the needs of the player.

  (3) The ending period, the extension standby period of the round game, the opening period and the total time are not limited to the same configuration as the standby period between each round game, for example, the total time is the above-mentioned standby The configuration may be substantially the same as the period.

  (4) When the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode, the present invention is applied even to a configuration in which the variable display time is set to the shortest until the hold information is digested. Can. In this case, even in a situation in which the hold information stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb corresponds to a big hit, it is possible to generate an effect as if the round game is extended. It becomes. Specifically, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, “1” is set to the fourth extension flag of the RAM 64. The fourth extension flag is a flag for specifying that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. . If “1” is set in the fourth extension flag of the RAM 64, “Extended round game preparation in progress” is displayed on the display screen G after the end of the open / close execution mode. In addition, when “1” is set in the fourth extension flag of the RAM 64, the total time of the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game, and the opening period is the same as the standby period between each round game.

  (5) The effect displayed on the display screen G during the extension standby period of the round game may be similar to the effect displayed on the display screen G between each round game. The effect displayed on the display screen G during each round game is, specifically, an effect in which the character is waving his hand with a smile, for example. According to the configuration, it is possible to continue the round game without the player feeling discomfort, so it is possible to surely make the player think that the round game has been extended.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be individually applied to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined with each other, and the following different configurations may be individually applied to the combined configurations, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the first, second and fourth embodiments, it may be possible to simultaneously digest the holding information stored in the holding areas Ra and Rb. In this case, it is determined whether the number of rounds is to be added for the suspension information stored in the suspension areas Ra and Rb which are not the suspension areas Ra and Rb in which the simultaneously digested suspension information is stored. It may be a configuration to be performed. According to the configuration, it is possible to expect the number of rounds to be added and to speed up the speed at which the pending information is digested.

  (2) In the first, second and fourth embodiments, the jackpot is won in the high probability mode and in the situation where the number of holding information stored in the second holding area Rb is one or less. If the number of holding information stored in the first holding area Ra is one or more, is the number of rounds added to the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra? The configuration may be such that determination processing of whether or not is performed.

  In the first, second and fourth embodiments, when the jackpot is won in the low probability mode and in the situation where the number of holding information stored in the first holding area Ra is 0, 2 If the number of pending information stored in the pending area Rb is more than one, one pending information stored in the second pending area Rb is left and stored in the second pending area Rb. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds is performed on the other pieces of pending information.

  According to the above-described two configurations, the probability of determining whether to add the number of rounds is high when the jackpot is won, so the frequency of adding the number of rounds increases. This makes it possible to expect the number of rounds to be added.

  (3) In the first, second and fourth embodiments, in the case where the 16R probability variation jackpot results, in the state where a part of the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb is left, the second holding In the holding information stored in the area Rb, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is to be added, and when the result of the 16R normal jackpot is reached, all the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb is round The configuration may be configured to determine whether to add a number. Here, when the 16R probability variation big hit results, since there is a high possibility that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode will be after the open / close execution mode, the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is performed secondly It is better for the player if the holding information remains in the holding area Rb. This is because it is possible to start a game run triggered by the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb after the number of rounds has been added. On the other hand, when the 16R normal big hit results, the possibility of becoming a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode is low, so after the determination processing whether to add the number of rounds is performed second pending It is more pleasing to the player that the number of pieces of hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is larger than the case where the hold information remains in the area Rb. This is because there is a high possibility that the number of rounds will be added. According to the configuration, it is possible for the player to make the holding information to be different in the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds according to the type of the jackpot result that has become the transition trigger to the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to perform the above-mentioned judgment processing under convenient conditions.

  (4) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, when the 6R normal jackpot result and the 16R normal jackpot result, the holding area Ra, which is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds, When Rb is set to the second holding area Rb and the 6R probability variation big hit result and the 16R probability variation big hit result, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds are the first It may be configured to be set in the holding area Ra.

  (5) In the first, second and fourth embodiments, the round game as a jackpot result that is selected when a jackpot is won in the acceptance determination process in the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra There are multiple types of jackpot results that differ in the number of times of execution, and as a jackpot result that is selected when the jackpot is won in the qualification process in the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb In a configuration where there are multiple types of jackpot results that differ in the number of times the round game is executed, if a determination process is performed to determine whether or not to add the number of rounds, the selection is made when a big hit is won in the determination process. The number of round games executed is the number of round games executed corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode It may be configured to be calculated. Here, in the judgment processing of the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra, as a jackpot result selected when a jackpot is won, 4R ordinary jackpot result, 8R ordinary jackpot result, 12R probability variation A case where a jackpot result is provided and the first holding area Ra is a target of determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds will be specifically described as an example. In the yes / no judgment processing in the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra, the 4R normal big hit results and the number of rounds is added to the first holding area Ra that is the target of the judgment processing of whether to add the number of rounds If the normal jackpot result, the in-hold 8R normal jackpot result, and the in-hold 12R probability variation jackpot result is included, the number of rounds of this round game will be 28R (4R + 4R + 8R + 12R) (However, in the second embodiment, the number of rounds When it becomes an addition winning in the lottery process of whether to add or not, it becomes 28R).

  In addition, in the configuration, there is a latent probability jackpot result in which only a short opening occurs as a type of jackpot result, and in the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, the in-hold latent probability jackpot result occurs The short release may be added. Specifically, the short opening may be performed after the round game corresponding to the long opening is performed. According to the configuration, it is possible to surely give a benefit to any of the jackpot results. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the hold information that is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds includes the hold information that results in the in-hold latent probability jackpot, the short The configuration may be such that the release is not added.

  (6) In the first, second and fourth embodiments, when the number of rounds is added, the number of fixed rounds is added regardless of the value of the jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. It is good also as composition. According to the configuration, it is necessary to digest the number of rounds in a situation where the number of held information corresponding to the jackpot winning included in the held information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is large. It becomes possible to prevent the time from becoming too long.

  (7) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, when performing the process of judging whether the number of rounds is to be added, the process of judging whether the pending information is to be added or not is referred to by referring to the dedicated table The configuration may be such that the success or failure determination process is performed. Specifically, it is referred to when performing the process of judging the pass / fail of the hold information to be subjected to the process of judging whether to add the number of rounds or not, the table of success / failure for low probability mode, the table of success / failure for high probability mode. The special success / failure table to be The special success / failure table may be configured to have a jackpot winning probability lower than that of the low probability mode.

  In the configuration in which the success / failure table for the low probability mode, the success / failure table for the high probability mode, and the special success / failure table are set, one success / failure table is randomly selected from the three types of success / failure tables, With reference to the selected success / failure table, the success / failure determination process of the holding information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds may be performed. According to the configuration, it becomes possible to expect that the success / failure table having the high jackpot probability is selected in the success / failure determination processing of the holding information subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds. .

  In a configuration in which a plurality of types of success or failure tables having different jackpot winning probabilities are set, the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the suspension information to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds. It may be configured that a success or failure table having a high jackpot winning probability is selected as the number of times the number is increased. According to the configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage of the situation in which the number of pending information corresponding to the big hit is included in the pending information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. It becomes possible.

  (8) In the first, second and fourth embodiments, when the second holding area Rb is the target of the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds, it is stored in the second holding area Rb Of the pending information, the number of pending information not to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds may be greater than one. According to the configuration, it is possible to lower the probability that the game play triggered by the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra may be executed in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Become.

  (9) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, in the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds, the success / failure determination process is performed in the order in which the hold information is acquired. If the jackpot is won in the process of judging whether or not to win, the decision on holding information which is scheduled to be the target of the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds obtained after the hold information on which the jackpot was won. The configuration may be such that processing is not performed. Here, among the players, there may be a player who wants to be added the number of rounds and wants to digest the game times corresponding to the big hit. In that respect, according to the configuration, the upper limit to which the number of rounds is added is set in advance. This makes it possible to add the number of rounds, and to prevent the number of times the effect displayed on the display screen G is seen from being reduced in the game times corresponding to the big hit.

  (10) In the first, second and fourth embodiments, the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds is from the start of the game round corresponding to the big hit to the end It is not limited to being the hold information acquired during the period, for example, until the game times corresponding to the big hit are started with the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. It may be pending information that has been acquired. According to the configuration, the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is the hold information acquired before the game turn corresponding to the big hit is started. Even if it is started and it is going to acquire pending | holding information during the said game times, the said pending | holding information does not turn into pending | holding information used as the object of determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effects displayed on the display screen G in the game round corresponding to the big hit.

  With the configuration in which the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is the hold information acquired before the game round corresponding to the big hit is started, the hold information obtained when the jackpot is won If the hold information to be a big hit is included in the game, the reach effect of the hold information is specified, and the reach effect with a frequency of occurrence lower than that of the reach effect where the reach effect is executed in the current game round In this case, the reach effect to be executed in the current game round may be changed to the reach effect corresponding to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning included in the hold information. According to the configuration, it is possible to prevent the reach effect with a low occurrence frequency which is to be displayed from being undisplayed.

  (11) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the hold information subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds. The jackpot result included in the pending information included in the target of the determination process whether to add the number of rounds after digesting the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode It may be configured to digest the number of rounds corresponding to. Here, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is 6R, the jackpot result included in the suspension information included in the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds The case where the number of rounds corresponding to is 16R is described as an example. Specifically, first, the 6R corresponding to the jackpot result that has triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is digested. After the image for notifying the player that the round game is over is displayed on the display screen G, it is included in the hold information that is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. A 16R round game corresponding to the jackpot result is started. On the other hand, if the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not included in the hold information subjected to the determination process whether or not to add the number of rounds, the round game will end after the 6R is digested. An image to be notified to the player is displayed on the display screen G, and the round game is ended. Therefore, according to the configuration, after the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is digested, among the suspension information that is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds It is possible to make it expect that the round game corresponding to the jackpot result included in can be started.

  (12) In the first, second and fourth embodiments, the player may be able to select the hold information to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds. Specifically, when the gaming state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the selection image for causing the player to select the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds on the display screen G is selected. Is displayed. The player operates the selection button provided on the upper side bulging portion 56 to select the holding information to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds. According to the configuration, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is to be added based on the holding information selected by the player himself, so when the number of rounds is added, the sense of superiority over the addition of the number of rounds is large. Become. Furthermore, according to the configuration, the process of selecting the suspension information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is added to the game, so that it is possible to provide the player with a novel game. Become.

  (13) In the first, second and fourth embodiments, the game is played if the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds contains the hold information to be a big hit. The person may select whether to add the number of rounds. Specifically, in the first and fourth embodiments, when the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds includes the hold information to be a big hit, the second In the embodiment, when it is determined that the addition is won in the lottery process of adding the number of rounds, a selection image for causing the player to select whether to add the number of rounds on the display screen G is displayed. Ru. The player operates the selection button provided on the upper bulging portion 56 to select whether to add the number of rounds. In this case, when a pattern for adding the number of rounds is selected, a value corresponding to the number of pending information for winning a big hit is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, and the number of rounds is added. The hold information that is the target of the determination process of whether or not to clear is cleared to "0". On the other hand, when a pattern in which the number of rounds is not added is selected, "6" or "16" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. Also, in this case, the hold information that has been subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is not cleared to “0”. If the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds includes the hold information to be a big hit, the player can select whether or not to add the number of rounds. With the configuration, it is possible to change the game content in accordance with the mood of the player.

  (14) In the first, second and fourth embodiments, it is said that the number of rounds may be added on the display screen G in a situation where the game round corresponding to the big hit is executed. May occur. Specifically, in a situation where the game round corresponding to the big hit is executed, a display such as "may be added the number of rounds when the big hit is won" is generated on the display screen G. Good. The display includes the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the situation where the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is included in the suspension information targeted for the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds. It is good also as composition which is easy to occur compared with a situation where it does not occur. According to the configuration, it is possible to expect that an effect will be generated that may indicate that the number of rounds may be added on the display screen G each time a game is started.

  (15) In the first, second and fourth embodiments, in the high probability mode, the lower actuation opening on the display screen G when the number of second starting balls pending NB becomes smaller than a predetermined number. It may be configured to display that it is better to generate a winning on 24. The above-mentioned predetermined number is lower than the second information for holding area Rb when the holding operation stored in the second holding area Rb disappears when the firing operation is started from the state where the second starting holding ball number NB becomes smaller than the predetermined number. It is set in consideration of an increase in the probability that a winning on the operation port 24 will occur. Here, according to the present embodiment, in the high probability mode, it is assumed that the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb frequently occurs. In this case, the player may not perform the firing operation. Then, even if the launch operation is started in a situation where the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is digested and the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is reduced, There is a possibility that a winning on the lower operation opening 24 will not occur before the starting holding ball number NB becomes “0”. In this case, in the high probability mode, a game run triggered by the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is started. In this respect, according to the present configuration, when the second start-holding ball number NB becomes smaller than the predetermined number in the high probability mode, a winning on the lower operation opening 24 is generated on the display screen G. Will be displayed. It is possible to instruct the player who has canceled the launch operation to start the launch operation. In this way, it is possible to prevent the start of a game run triggered by the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in the high probability mode.

  (16) In the first to fourth embodiments, the winning on the upper operating opening 23 and the winning on the lower operating opening 24 may not be distinguished. In the configuration, in the first, second, and fourth embodiments, the suspension information to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds may be all of the acquired suspension information. , May be part of the pending information that has been acquired. Further, in the third embodiment, the holding information that can be simultaneously digested may be a configuration that is all of the obtained holding information, or may be a configuration that is a part of the obtained holding information. Good.

  (17) In the first to fourth embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the first starting holding ball number NA and the second starting holding ball number NB are each set to 1 byte, for example, the first starting The number of holding balls number NA and the second starting holding ball number NB may be set to 1 byte.

  The upper limit value of the hold information which can be stored in the first hold area Ra may be different from the upper limit value of the hold information which can be stored in the second hold area Rb. Further, in the configuration, the upper limit value of the hold information that can be stored in the first hold area Ra is smaller than the upper limit value of the hold information that can be stored in the second hold area Rb. It may be Here, when the high-frequency support mode is selected, winning of the lower operation port 24 is likely to occur, so it is conceivable that the number of pieces of suspension information stored in the second suspension area Rb becomes a considerable number. On the other hand, not only in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the ease of winning the upper operating port 23 does not change. According to this configuration, it is possible to set upper limit values corresponding to the number of pieces of pending information that are assumed to be stored in the respective pending areas Ra and Rb.

  (18) In the first to fourth embodiments, the hold information may not be acquired even if a winning on the operation openings 23 and 24 occurs during the round game. Here, in the case where the hold information is acquired when a winning of the operation openings 23, 24 occurs during the round game, the number of the hold information may be too large. In this case, the player can not continue the firing operation. In this respect, according to the present configuration, even if a win occurs in the operation openings 23 and 24 during the round game, the hold information is not acquired, and therefore it is possible to prevent the number of hold information from becoming too large. It becomes. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to continue the firing operation.

  In addition, in the above configuration, when a winning on the operation openings 23, 24 occurs during a round game, a benefit may be provided to the player. Specifically, when a winning on the operation opening 23, 24 occurs during a round game, a character is displayed only when a winning on the operation opening 23, 24 occurs during the round game on the display screen G. It may be configured to be displayed. According to the configuration, it is possible to expect a winning to the operation openings 23 and 24 to occur in the round game even if the hold information is not acquired. Further, in the configuration, depending on the number of game balls that have won the operation openings 23 and 24 during the round game, the benefit given to the player may be different. Specifically, a configuration in which an effect with a lower frequency of occurrence in the next round game of the round game is more likely to be displayed on the display screen G as the number of winnings to the operation openings 23, 24 increases in one round game. It may be According to the configuration, it is possible to expect that more winnings on the operation openings 23 and 24 occur in the round game.

  Further, depending on the operation openings 23 and 24 in which the winning is generated during the round game, the provided benefits may be different. Specifically, for example, when winning in the upper operation opening 23 occurs during the round game, it becomes possible to obtain the hold information, and when winning in the lower operation opening 24 occurs during the round game, the display screen An image may be displayed that is displayed only when a winning on the lower operation opening 24 occurs during the round game on G. According to the configuration, it is possible to prevent the reserve information from being acquired too much in the round game, and to increase the attention to the operation openings 23 and 24 in the round game.

  (19) In the first to fourth embodiments, even if the number of rounds is added, it is not limited to the configuration in which the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning on the large winning opening 22a does not change. When the number of rounds is added, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning in the large winning opening 22a is increased in consideration of the upper limit of the total number of gaming balls paid out to the player in one opening / closing execution mode It may be In this case, it is possible to reduce the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 22a. Therefore, according to the configuration, even if the number of rounds is added, the total number of gaming balls to be paid out to the player in one opening / closing execution mode, while not changing the time required to digest the round game. It is possible to increase the upper limit.

  (20) In the first to fourth embodiments, when the upper limit number of rounds after addition reaches a predetermined value, the number of rounds exceeding the predetermined value is stocked, and the next time the jackpot is won The number of rounds of the stock may be added to the number of rounds of. Here, the configuration will be specifically described on the assumption that the predetermined value is set to 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the predetermined value is set to 32R. Specifically, two or more pieces of hold information corresponding to a big hit are included in the hold information that is the target of the determination process whether to add the number of rounds, which is won to the 16R probability variation big hit result If the number of rounds is equal to the maximum number of rounds, the upper limit number of rounds after the addition is 32R. If the number of pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning included in the pending information to be determined whether to add the number of rounds is two, it means that the remaining 16R is stocked, and the number of rounds If there are three pieces of pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning included in the pending information to be determined whether to add or not, it means that the remaining 32R is stocked and the number of rounds is added In the case where the number of pieces of suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning included in the suspension information to be determined whether or not to be 4 is four, the remaining 48R is stocked. When the number of rounds is stocked, the number of rounds stocked is added to the number of rounds at the next jackpot winning. In this case, when the number of rounds after addition exceeds 32R, the number of rounds is kept stocked or the number of rounds is newly stocked.

  Here, during the round game, it is not possible to leave the seat because the player must perform a shooting operation. Also, the longer the number of rounds, the longer the time when it is not possible to leave the seat. Therefore, as the number of rounds increases, the time for restraining the player becomes longer. In that respect, according to this configuration, even if the upper limit number of rounds after addition exceeds the predetermined value, the upper limit number of rounds after addition becomes the predetermined value. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure that the number of rounds is added and to prevent the time for which the player is restrained to be long. Further, according to the present configuration, the number of rounds exceeding the predetermined value is stocked, and the number of rounds stocked is added to the number of rounds at the next jackpot winning. Therefore, when the number of rounds is added, it is possible to make the player want to play a game until the next jackpot win. This makes it possible for the player to play the game for as long as possible.

  (21) In the first to fourth embodiments, the number of pending information stored in the first pending area Ra and the number of pending information stored in the second pending area Rb are on the display screen G. It may be configured to be displayed other than. Specifically, for example, at the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32, a first display unit for displaying the number of pieces of suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra is provided. A second display unit may be provided in the upper right portion to display the number of pieces of suspension information stored in the second suspension area Rb. According to the configuration, even if the display screen G is not viewed, the number of holding information stored in the first holding area Ra and the number of holding information stored in the second holding area Rb are specified. It becomes possible.

  (22) In the first to fourth embodiments, the number is the same as the number of holding information stored in the holding areas Ra and Rb corresponding to the first holding number display area Ga and the second holding number display area Gb. The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which numbers are displayed, and any display may be performed as long as display corresponding to the number of pieces of hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb is performed. Specifically, for example, the hold display corresponding to the number of pieces of hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb may be performed.

  (23) In the fifth and seventh embodiments, the upper limit number of times of game times in which the variable display time is set to 0.5 sec after the open / close execution mode is limited is limited to 3 times Alternatively, for example, the upper limit number of times of game play may be set to one, two, or three times, in which the variable display time is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shortest after the open / close execution mode ends.

  In addition, the upper limit number of times of game times in which the fluctuation display time is set to 0.5 sec which is shortest after the opening / closing execution mode ends is from the number of holding information stored in the second holding area Rb when the opening / closing execution mode is ended. Alternatively, one less unit may be used.

  (24) In the fifth and seventh embodiments, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is also set to “1” when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the first hold area Ra. The configuration may be Specifically, in the fifth embodiment, the second start-hold ball number NB is “2”, and the second hold area Rb does not include the hold information corresponding to the big hit and the first hold area When the first reserve area Ra1 of Ra includes reserve information corresponding to a big hit, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. In addition, the first start holding area Ra1 of the first holding area Ra or the situation where the second start holding ball number NB is “1” and the second holding area Rb does not include the holding information corresponding to the big hit. When the second reserve area Ra2 includes reserve information corresponding to a big hit, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. In addition, the first suspension area Ra1 of the first suspension area Ra, where the second starting suspension ball number NB is “0” and the second suspension area Rb does not include suspension information corresponding to a big hit. When the second reserve area Rb2 or the third reserve area Rb3 includes reserve information corresponding to a big hit, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. When "1" is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 triggered by the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first holding area Ra, the jackpot is won at the timing when the extension flag is set to "1". The player is informed that the hold information corresponding to is stored and that the winning of the lower operation port 24 is not generated. Specifically, on the display screen G, it is displayed that "Extension of round game is confirmed. Note: Do not generate a winning on the lower operation opening." Here, when the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the first hold area Ra, the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb. The pending information will be preferentially digested. In this case, the time required to start the next round game may be long. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the first display area Ra corresponds to a big hit in the first holding area in balance with the upper limit number of times of the game times in which the variable display time is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shortest after the open / close execution mode ends. When the holding information is specified, it is different whether or not the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. As a result, it is possible to set “1” to the extension flag of the RAM 64 only in a situation where the variable display time is 0.5 seconds, which is the shortest. Therefore, even in a situation where the first hold area Ra stores hold information corresponding to a big hit, it is possible to set an effect as if the round game was extended.

  Furthermore, according to the present configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” triggered by the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first holding area Ra, the winning of the lower operation port 24 The player is informed that he is trying not to generate As a result, it is possible to prevent new pending information from being stored in the second pending area Rb until the pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first pending area Ra is digested. It becomes.

  Specifically, in the seventh embodiment, the second start-holding ball number NB is “0”, and the second holding area Rb does not store holding information corresponding to a big hit and the first holding area. When the first hold area Ra1 of Ra stores hold information corresponding to a big hit, the fourth extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. The fourth extension flag is a flag for specifying that the number of game times to be executed until the next round game is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is one. In addition, the second start holding ball number NB is “0”, and the second holding area Ra2 of the first holding area Ra does not store holding information corresponding to the big hit in the second holding area Rb. When the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored, the fifth extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. The fifth extension flag is a flag for specifying that the number of game times to be executed until the next round game is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is two. In addition, the second start pending ball number NB is "0", and the second pending area Rb does not store the pending information corresponding to the big hit and the third pending area Ra3 of the first pending area Ra. When the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored, the sixth extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. The sixth extension flag is a flag for specifying that the number of game times to be executed until the next round game is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is three times.

  In addition, in the situation where the second starting holding ball number NB is “1” and the holding information corresponding to the big hit is not stored in the second holding area Rb and in the first holding area Ra1 of the first holding area Ra. When the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored, the fifth extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. In addition, the second start holding ball number NB is “1”, and the second holding area Ra2 of the first holding area Ra does not store holding information corresponding to a big hit in the second holding area Rb. When the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored, the sixth extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. In addition, the second start pending ball number NB is “2”, and the second pending area Rb does not store the pending information corresponding to the big hit and the first pending area Ra1 of the first pending area Ra. When the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored, the sixth extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”.

  The player is notified that the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is stored at the timing when one of the extension flags is set to “1” and that the lower operation opening 24 is not generated a prize. Ru. Specifically, on the display screen G, it is displayed that "Extension of round game is confirmed. Note: Do not generate a winning on the lower operation opening." As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower operating port 24 from winning.

  In addition, when “1” is set in any of the extension flags, the ending period and the opening period are shortened. Specifically, the ending period and the opening period are shortened such that the total time of the ending period, the extension standby period of the round game, and the opening period is the same as the standby period between each round game.

  (25) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the opening period may not be generated at the start of the next open / close execution mode when an effect such as an extension of a round game is generated. In addition, when an effect is generated as if the round game is extended, the ending period may not occur. Further, when an effect is generated as if the round game is extended, the opening period may not occur at the ending period and at the start of the next opening / closing execution mode. According to the above three configurations, when an effect as if the round game is extended occurs on the display screen G, the time required for the next round game to start is shortened. It becomes possible to prevent that the round game can not be made to seem as if it has been extended.

  (26) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when an effect is generated as if the round game is extended, the opening effect when the next round game is started is “extended on the display screen G. The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which a still image of “minute round game start!” Is displayed, and may be configured to generate, for example, a moving image effect. Specifically, for example, a character may be displayed on the display screen G, and the character may perform an operation (for example, an operation of the character clapping a hand with a smile) to congratulate the extension of the round game.

  (27) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the timing at which the on-hold propriety judgment process is performed in the opening / closing execution mode may be changed according to the situation. Specifically, at the time when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the on-hold propriety check process is performed on the acquired on-hold information. In the case of not having a jackpot in the on-hold propriety judgment process, the on-hold propriety judgment process may be performed each time the on-hold information to be judged in the on-hold propriety judgment process is acquired. If the jackpot is won in the on / off status determination process, the notification effect corresponding to the jackpot may be generated at the timing when the jackpot is won. Here, when the notification effect is not generated on the display screen G at the timing when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, it is specified to the player that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not stored in the hold. It will be done. In this case, the player's motivation may be reduced. If the player's motivation declines, the open / close execution mode can not be played happily. In that respect, according to the present configuration, when the notification effect is not generated at the timing when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, every time after that, the hold information to be judged in the hold judgment process is obtained. The in-hold propriety judgment process is performed, and the notification effect occurs at the timing when the jackpot is won. When the notification effect is generated, since the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the hold, the motivation of the player is improved. Therefore, by improving the motivation of the player as early as possible, it is possible to prevent the time during which the player can not enjoy the open / close execution mode from becoming long.

  (28) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, it may be determined whether or not the on-hold propriety judgment process is performed in the opening / closing execution mode by lottery. Specifically, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to perform the on-hold propriety check process at the timing when the big hit results. Only in the case where it is determined in the lottery that the on-hold propriety judgment process is to be performed, the on-hold propriety judgment process is performed in the opening / closing execution mode. Here, assuming that the in-hold propriety judgment processing is always performed in the open / close execution mode, the informing is not performed when the notification effect notifying that the in-hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored is not generated. It is specified to the player that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is not stored in the inside. In that respect, according to this configuration, since the in-hold propriety judgment process may not be performed in the open / close execution mode, the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the hold even if the notification effect is not generated. Can be expected to

  In the configuration, in the lottery process whether or not the in-hold propriety determination process is performed rather than the case where the higher probability mode is the lower probability mode, the determination result of executing the within-proportional decision processing The configuration may be easy. Here, there is a high possibility that the player is expecting the occurrence of the notification effect. Therefore, according to the configuration, it is possible to secure a benefit for winning a jackpot in the high probability mode.

  (29) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the number of times the on-hold propriety judgment process is performed in one opening / closing execution mode may be performed more than twice. In addition, in the configuration, a notification effect may be generated to notify that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the hold at the timing when the big hit is won. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to increase the frequency | count which can be excited whether the said notification production generate | occur | produces.

  The configuration may be such that the number of times the on-hold pass / fail judgment process is performed in the open / close execution mode is one. In the said structure, it is good also as a structure by which the said in-hold propriety judgment process is performed at the time of completion | finish of a round game. Here, it is possible to obtain hold information even during a round game. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to perform the within-preservation propriety determination process in a situation where the number of pieces of suspension information to be determined in the above-mentioned within-prohibition propriety determination process is large. Therefore, it can be expected that the notification effect is generated.

  The on-hold propriety judgment process may be performed at the first start of fluctuation after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the on-hold propriety judgment process may be performed both in the open / close execution mode and at the first change start after the open / close execution mode ends, or at the first change start after the open / close execution mode ends. It may be configured that only in-hold propriety judgment processing is performed. In the configuration in which in-hold propriety judgment processing is performed both in the open / close execution mode and at the first change start after the open / close execution mode ends, the within hold judgment whether the first change start after the open / close execution mode If it is specified in the process that the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is stored, the effect corresponding to that may be displayed on the display screen G during the extension standby period of the round game. . Specifically, a smile character may be displayed on the display screen G as if it is a blessing to extend the round game. According to the school configuration, it is possible to increase the joy of extending the round game.

  In the configuration in which the in-hold propriety determination processing is performed only at the first start of fluctuation after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the round game is performed on the display screen G until the on-hold information that is the determination target of the in-hold determination processing is digested. It may be configured to display an image to notify that it may extend. Specifically, an image may be displayed on the display screen G, "May round games extend?" In the configuration, when it is specified that the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the above-mentioned process of judging whether or not it is in reserve, "round game start for extension!" Is displayed on the display screen G and the next The round game may be started. In this case, the player feels as if the round game has been extended. According to the configuration, it is possible to make the player think as if the round game has been extended even if the in-hold propriety judgment process is not performed in the opening / closing execution mode.

  The on-hold condition determination process may be performed only between the end of the opening period and the start of the ending period. Further, it may be configured that the pending / non-pending status determination process is performed only during the ending period. It is possible to obtain hold information even after the round game is over. According to the configuration, it is possible to perform the within-preservation propriety determination process in a situation where the number of pieces of suspension information to be determined in the above-mentioned within-prohibition propriety determination process is large.

  (30) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the timing at which the notification effect of notifying that the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored is held is the on-hold in the on / off judgment process. The timing is not limited to the above. For example, when a big hit is won in the above-mentioned on-hold propriety judgment process, the timing to generate the above notification effect may be determined by lottery. According to the configuration, it is possible to play the game while expecting the notification effect to be always performed during the round game.

  When it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the hold information acquired in the open / close execution mode, the lottery process of whether to generate a notification effect notifying that effect is specified. It may be a configuration to be performed. Here, if the notification effect is not generated in the open / close execution mode, the player is specified that the acquired suspension information does not include suspension information corresponding to a big hit. In that respect, according to the present configuration, the notification effect may not occur even if it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the hold information acquired in the open / close execution mode. There is. As a result, even if the notification effect does not occur in the open / close execution mode, it is possible to expect that the acquired suspension information includes suspension information corresponding to a big hit.

  (31) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the variation display time may be different after the opening / closing execution mode ends between the 6R, 16R normal jackpot result and the 6R, 16R positive variation jackpot result. In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the type determination process is not performed after the in-hold validity determination process is performed. Therefore, the type of the jackpot result stored in the hold can not be identified until the round game corresponding to the hold information ends. In that respect, according to this configuration, the fluctuation display time after the opening / closing execution mode is different according to the type of the jackpot result. That is, it is possible to specify the type of jackpot result stored in the hold by specifying the variable display time after the open / close execution mode ends. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the fluctuation display time after the end of the open / close execution mode.

  (32) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the hold information corresponding to the out result stored in the area lower than the hold information corresponding to the big hit may be deleted. According to the configuration, it is possible to shorten the time from the end of the opening / closing execution mode until the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning is digested as short as possible, so the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning is digested It is possible to make it more unnoticeable that the next round game has been started.

  (33) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the on-hold propriety judgment process may be performed also on the on-hold information acquired after the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit. In the configuration, when a plurality of pieces of suspension information corresponding to a big hit are identified in the on-hold pass / fail determination process, a notification corresponding to the presence of a plurality of pieces of pending information to be a big hit is performed. It is also good. Specifically, for example, in the case where a plurality of pieces of suspension information corresponding to a big hit are identified in the on-hold pass / fail determination process, “A round game extension is stocked!” Is displayed on the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to expect that the notification effect corresponding to the presence of a plurality of pieces of suspension information for winning a big hit will be performed.

  (34) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, in the configuration in which the in-hold propriety check processing is performed also in the hold information acquired later than the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win, the jackpot wins in the in-hold propriety check process. If it is specified that the above is specified, type determination processing may be performed. In addition, in the configuration, when a plurality of suspension information corresponding to a big hit is identified in the suspension in-procedibility determination process, it is indicated that the round game is extended by the total number of rounds corresponding to the result of the in-class determination process. It may be configured to be notified on the display screen G. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the determination target of the in-hold propriety judgment process is the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 to the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, the second hold area Rb The hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 of corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result The hold information stored in the third reserve area Rb3 of the second reserve area Rb corresponds to the disconnection result, and the reserve information stored in the fourth reserve area Rb4 of the second reserve area Rb is 16R If it corresponds to the jackpot result, the effect that the round game is extended is displayed on the display screen G by 28R which is the total of 6R, 6R, and 16R. Specifically, an image “+ 28R” is displayed on the display screen G. The image “+ 28R” is displayed on the display screen G until the 28R corresponding to the extension is digested. According to the configuration, it is possible to not only focus on whether or not the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the suspension, but also to focus on the total of the extended round games.

  Also in the holding information acquired later than the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning decision processing within the holding status judgment processing is performed, when it is specified in the holding status judgment processing during the holding is that the jackpot winning is specified, the type judgment processing is performed In the configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is continuously stored, the display screen G indicates that the round game is extended by the total number of rounds at the time when the hold information corresponding to the out result is specified. It may be configured to be displayed above. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the determination target of the in-hold propriety judgment process is the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 to the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, the second hold area Rb The hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 of corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result The hold information stored in the third reserve area Rb3 of the second reserve area Rb corresponds to the disconnection result, and the reserve information stored in the fourth reserve area Rb4 of the second reserve area Rb is 16R When it corresponds to the jackpot result, it is displayed on the display screen G that the round game is extended by 12R which is a total of 6R and 6R. Specifically, an image “+ 12R” is displayed on the display screen G. The image “+ 12R” is displayed on the display screen G until the 12R corresponding to the extension is digested.

  Also in the holding information acquired later than the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning decision processing within the holding status judgment processing is performed, when it is specified in the holding status judgment processing during the holding is that the jackpot winning is specified, the type judgment processing is performed In the configuration, in the situation where it is continuously specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored, it is specified that it is the out result in the on-hold propriety judgment process for the next hold information In this case, it may be configured that the on-hold propriety judgment process for the on-hold information after that is not performed. In this case, the fact that the round game is to be extended may be displayed on the display screen G by the total number of rounds at the time when the hold information corresponding to the out result is specified.

  (35) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, even at the end of the round game even if the hold information corresponding to the big hit is specified in the in-hold propriety determination process performed in the specific number of rounds In the configuration in which the in-hold propriety judgment process is performed for the hold information, and when it is specified that the jackpot is not winning in the in-hold propriety judgment process, the in-hold propriety judgment process is performed again on the hold information. The notification may be performed according to the result of the on-hold propriety judgment process. According to the configuration, it is possible to accurately perform the in-hold propriety judgment process.

  (36) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the hold information once subjected to the judgment of the within-hold propriety judgment process is set as the judgment target of the within-hold propriety judgment process to be performed again during the one open / close execution mode It is good also as composition which is not done. In this case, the determination result of the first on-hold propriety determination process is stored in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 specifies the holding information to be the determination target of the second in-hold propriety judgment process by specifying the determination result of the first in-holding propriety judgment process stored in the RAM 64. Here, when the same hold information is to be determined, the determination results in the first hold in-progress determination process and the second in-hold propriety determination process do not differ from each other. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the pending internal determination process, which is the same determination result, from being executed again.

  (37) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when the on-hold propriety judgment process is performed, the determination result on the on-hold propriety judgment process is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90, and the sound emission control apparatus 90 The MPU 92 may be configured to check the determination result of the within-preservation propriety determination process in the same suspension information a plurality of times. Specifically, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 transmits a determination result command to the sound emission control device 90 when the on-hold propriety determination process is performed. The determination result command includes the information of the determination result of the in-hold propriety determination process. That is, the determination result command includes information on the jackpot result or the outlier result. The determination result of the pending / not-qualified status determination process is stored in the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 62 of the voice emission control device 90 determines whether or not the determination result of the on-hold propriety determination process stored in the RAM 94 is a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot winning flag of the RAM 94 is set to “1”. After that, the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 again determines whether or not the determination result of the in-hold propriety determination process stored in the RAM 94 is a big hit. In the situation where it is specified that the judgment result of the pending / non-presence judgment process is a big hit, if the big hit winning flag of the RAM 94 is set to “1”, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 wins the big hit. A notification command for notifying the player that the hold information corresponding to the winning is included is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. As a result, an image notifying that the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the on-hold on the display screen G is displayed. According to the configuration, the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 can accurately determine whether or not to display an image to notify that the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is included in the suspension. It becomes possible.

  The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 confirms the judgment result of the hold judgment process during the round game based on the judgment result of the hold judgment process performed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 during the round game. The same determination result may be confirmed again during the ending period. Specifically, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 transmits a determination result command to the sound emission control device 90 when the on-hold in-progress / not-in-progress determination process is performed during the round game. The determination result command includes the information of the determination result of the in-hold propriety determination process. That is, the determination result command includes information on the jackpot result or the outlier result. The determination result of the pending / not-qualified status determination process is stored in the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 62 of the voice emission control device 90 determines whether or not the determination result of the on-hold propriety determination process stored in the RAM 94 is a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot winning flag of the RAM 94 is set to “1”. Thereafter, during the ending period, the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 again determines whether or not the determination result of the on-hold propriety determination process stored in the RAM 94 is a big hit. In the situation where it is specified that the judgment result of the pending / non-presence judgment process is a big hit, if the big hit winning flag of the RAM 94 is set to “1”, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 wins the big hit. A notification command for notifying the player that the hold information corresponding to the winning is included is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. As a result, an image notifying that the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the on-hold on the display screen G is displayed. According to the configuration, the determination result of the in-hold propriety determination process in the same hold information is confirmed again during the ending period, so that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the holding period during the ending period. It is possible to correctly display an image for informing the user.

  The on-hold propriety judgment process may be performed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 instead of the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60. Specifically, when it is time to execute the on-hold propriety judgment process, the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 transmits a propriety judgment command to the sound emission control unit 90. The applicable / not appropriate determination command includes numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the on-hold information to be determined in the on-hold propriety determination process. Here, in this configuration, it is assumed that the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the jackpot winning is set in the ROM 93 of the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 62 of the voice light emission control device 90 has the same numerical value information of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the big hit selected set in the ROM 93 and the numeric information of the big hit random number counter C1 included in the above-mentioned pass / fail judgment command. It is determined multiple times whether or not. According to the configuration, the processing load of the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 can be reduced. If the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the jackpot winning set in the ROM 93 is the same as the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the above-mentioned acceptance determination command, the voice emission control device 90 holds A notification command is sent to the display control apparatus 100 to notify the player that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the inside. As a result, an image notifying that the on-hold information corresponding to the big hit is included in the on-hold on the display screen G is displayed. On the other hand, when the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the jackpot winning set in the ROM 93 is not identical to the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the acceptance determination command, the notification command is displayed. It is not transmitted to the control device 100.

  (38) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when the number of rounds reached a specific number and the round game of the upper limit number of times is over, it is the timing at which the on-hold pass / fail judgment processing is performed on the display screen G An image may be displayed to notify the player of the event. Specifically, for example, “in determination” may be displayed on the display screen G. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player clearly specify the timing at which the on-hold propriety judgment process is performed. As a result, whether or not notification effect to notify that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored is held or not even if it is not grasped the timing when the above-mentioned hold / non-presence propriety judgment processing is performed It becomes possible to get excited.

  (39) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the hold within the hold judgment process, the display screen G is displayed after the open / close execution mode is ended. The image of the 1R's of the round game corresponding to the extension may be displayed. In this case, the large winning opening 22a is not changed from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the above-mentioned image is displayed on the display screen G, and the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is extended. After the corresponding round number is set, the special winning opening 22a is opened from the closed state. According to the configuration, it is as if the round game has been extended when the round game is started, rather than the configuration in which “in preparation for the round game preparation for extension” is displayed on the display screen G after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is possible to make you think.

  (40) In the pachinko machine 10 in which the high frequency support mode in which the motorized part 24a of the lower operation port 24 is likely to be in the open state and the mode in which the electric part 24a of the lower aperture 24 is not in the open state The fifth to seventh inventions can be applied.

  (41) The fifth to seventh inventions can be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the upper limit number of pieces of reserve information which can be stored in the reserve areas Ra and Rb is more than four. In the pachinko machine 10 in which the upper limit number of pieces of pending information that can be stored in each of the pending areas Ra and Rb is greater than four, pending information corresponding to a big hit is stored in an area above the predetermined pending area. In this case, it may be configured to digest the hold information corresponding to the out result stored in the area lower than the hold area where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored. The predetermined holding area is set in consideration of the fact that the extension standby period of the round game does not become too long. Here, when the holding information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the area higher than the predetermined holding area, the extension standby period of the round game becomes too long. In this case, it becomes impossible for the player to seem as if the round game has been extended. In this respect, according to the present configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the area higher than the predetermined hold area, the hold area lower than the hold area where the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored. The hold information corresponding to the out result stored in the side area is digested. According to the configuration, by preventing the extended standby period of the round game from becoming too long, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming unable to think as if the round game has been extended. Is possible.

  (42) When the jackpot is won, the lottery mode after completion of the open / close execution mode always becomes the high probability mode, and when the jackpot is won triggered by the winning of the upper operation port 23, high frequency after the open / close execution mode The number of times the support mode continues is set from 0 times, 20 times, 50 times and 100 times, and when the jackpot is won with the winning of the lower operation port 24 as a trigger, after the open / close execution mode ends The first to seventh inventions can also be applied to a configuration in which the number of times the state in the high frequency support mode continues is set to 100 times.

  The distribution probability of the type of the jackpot result is different between the winning on the upper actuation opening 23 and the winning on the lower actuation opening 24 and the winning or losing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode by making V win during the round game. The first to seventh inventions can be applied to the configuration to be shifted.

  (43) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 100 is controlled by the sound emission control device 90 based on the command output from the main control device 60, display control based on the command output from the main control device 60 The apparatus 100 may be configured to control the sound emission control apparatus 90. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one function of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main control unit 60, and both functions of both control units may be integrated into the main control unit 60. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the configuration of the command output from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are also arbitrary.

  (44) The device on which the effects for the game run are executed is not limited to the symbol display device 31, and the configuration for which the effect for the game run is executed by operating the decorative member provided movable It is good also as composition which an effect for game circulation is performed by making a predetermined light emission part turn on, and an effect of game circulation is performed by combination of all or a part of the above-mentioned each mode Good.

  (45) Other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiment, for example, pachinko machines in which the motorized part opens a predetermined number of times when game balls enter a specific area of a special device The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine which becomes a jackpot upon entering and becomes a jackpot, a pachinko machine provided with other features, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a ball ball, and the like.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

  In addition, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which gaming balls are cyclically used without being discharged to the island facility. In addition, the player can not replenish the gaming balls to the pachinko machine, the number of gaming balls available to the player is managed as data, and the firing operation is performed under the situation where the number of available gaming balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which when the game ball is fired, the number of usable game balls is subtracted. In this case, when a prize is generated due to the occurrence of a winning on the upper operating opening 23, the lower operating opening 24, the large winning opening 22a or the like, the number of usable gaming balls is increased on the data.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration illustrated in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (pending information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition trigger (winning to the upper actuation opening 23 or lower actuation opening 24) Execution of winning processing for the operation opening in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 Function),
Predetermined information storage means (a first holding area Ra and a second holding area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A determination is made as to whether the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the addition correspondence information (information to be a big hit result) corresponding to the provision of profit, and a plurality of the predetermined information storage means are stored. An assignment determination unit (a function of executing variation start processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that sequentially performs the assignment determination on the plurality of pieces of predetermined information when the predetermined information is stored;
Privilege giving means (main control device 60) for giving a privilege to the player based on the result of the assignment judgment that the predetermined information to be judged corresponds to the assignment correspondence information. Function to execute the game state transition process in the MPU 62 of
Specifying means (first and second specifying means for specifying whether or not the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information before the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means becomes a target of the addition determination In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1003 and step S1005 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1703 and step S1705 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S2805 and step S3403 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and in the seventh embodiment, executing the processing of step S2805 and step S4203 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 Function),
The special execution means (the first execution means for executing special processing for causing an event advantageous to the player based on the fact that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information by the specific means) In the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1305 to step S1314 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1613 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, Function of executing the processing of step S2304 to step S2308 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), and
Exclusion means for excluding the specific predetermined information from the target of the assignment determination (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S911 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, in the second embodiment main control A function of executing the process of step S1614 in the MPU 62 of the apparatus 60, and in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, when the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information is performed before the specific predetermined information becomes the target of the addition determination, and the special information is corresponding Special processing is performed to generate an event advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation even in a situation where the award determination is not performed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, the specific predetermined information subjected to the specific execution as to whether or not it corresponds to the special information may be excluded from the target of the assignment determination. As a result, it becomes possible to further limit the occurrence of an event for which the specific predetermined information which has triggered the execution of the special processing is the target of the determination of giving, and the profit given to the player does not become excessive. It will be possible to

  Feature A2. Whether the specific predetermined information different from the predetermined information that triggered the assignment handling result corresponds to the special information in a situation where the result of the assignment determination results in the assignment handling result, the specifying unit It is specified whether or not it is a game machine according to feature A1.

  According to the feature A2, special processing may be performed as a further addition in a situation where the result of the assignment determination results in the response to the assignment. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to make the situation in which the special processing is executed clear to the player, and it is possible to increase the advantage of the result of the assignment determination becoming the assignment response result.

Feature A3. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) switchably provided between the open state and the closed state;
A predetermined gaming state in which the variable ball entering means is in the open state based on the result of the assignment determination becoming the assignment correspondence result in which the predetermined information to be determined corresponds to the assignment correspondence information. State transition means (a function for executing the game state transition process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for transitioning the game state to the round game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the special execution means increases the number of times of execution of the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information.

  According to the feature A3, the number of times of execution of the predetermined gaming state is increased based on the fact that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information in a situation in which the result of the determination of the addition has become the correspondence result. Here, the player is highly likely to want to increase the number of times of execution of the predetermined gaming state. Therefore, when the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information, it is possible to cause an event desired by the player. This makes it possible to enhance the feeling of excitement when the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information.

  Feature A4. The specifying means specifies that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information when the specific predetermined information is information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information at least in a predetermined situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

  According to the feature A4, in order to execute the special process triggered by specific predetermined information, the specific predetermined information needs to be information corresponding to the assigned correspondence information at least in a predetermined situation. This makes it possible to bring the conditions necessary for special processing to be performed closer to the conditions necessary for achieving the corresponding result, and the player's expectation that the predetermined information corresponds to the corresponding information. It is possible to enhance the feeling.

Feature A5. There are a plurality of modes (a low probability mode and a high probability mode) such that the probability of the assigned correspondence result becomes relatively high or low as the mode of the assigned determination,
The specifying means refers to the mode of the assignment determination which is to be set when the particular predetermined information is actually targeted for the assignment determination, and the particular predetermined information corresponds to the assignment correspondence information. Means for identifying whether or not corresponding (in the first and second embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1103 to step S1109 and step S1203 to step S1209 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, the third embodiment The gaming machine according to the feature A4, characterized in that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has a function of executing the processing of steps S2103 to S2105.

  According to the feature A5, it is possible to specify whether or not specific predetermined information corresponds to the assignment correspondence information under the same conditions as when the assignment determination is actually performed. In this way, in the case where it is specified whether or not the specific predetermined information corresponds to the assignment correspondence information, and in the case where the assignment determination which is actually scheduled to be performed in the particular predetermined information is performed, It is possible to prevent the resulting probabilities from being different.

Feature A6. There are a plurality of modes (a low probability mode and a high probability mode) such that the probability of the assigned correspondence result becomes relatively high or low as the mode of the assigned determination,
Means for specifying whether or not the specific predetermined information corresponds to the assignment correspondence information with reference to the mode of the assignment determination having a relatively low probability of becoming the assignment correspondence result The gaming machine according to the feature A4, characterized in that the MPU 62 of the control device 60 has a function of executing the processing of step S2403 and step S2503.

  According to the feature A6, whether or not the specific predetermined information corresponds to the assignment correspondence information is specified with reference to the mode of the assignment determination having a relatively low probability of becoming the assignment correspondence result. Therefore, even if a considerable number of specific predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the number of specific predetermined information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information will not be too large. This makes it possible to prevent an event that is advantageous to the player from occurring too much.

Feature A7. The special execution means is a lottery means (executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for specifying whether or not to execute the special process when the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information. Function to execute the processing of step S1706 to step S1713),
As the number of the specific predetermined information corresponding to the special information increases, the probability that the special process is performed in the lottery is likely to be high or high. The gaming machine according to any one.

  According to the feature A7, as the number of specific predetermined information items corresponding to the special information increases, the probability that the special process is performed in the lottery is likely to be high or high. According to the configuration, it is possible to give a benefit to a situation in which the number of specific predetermined information corresponding to the special information is large.

Feature A8. The special execution means is a lottery means (executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for specifying whether or not to execute the special process when the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information. Function to execute the processing of step S1706 to step S1713),
When the special process is executed in the lottery, the exclusion means excludes the specific predetermined information from the target of the assignment determination, while the special process is not executed in the lottery. In this case, the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7, wherein the specific predetermined information is not excluded from the target of the assignment determination.

  According to the feature A8, when the special process is executed in the lottery, the specific predetermined information is excluded from the target of the assignment determination, and on the other hand, when the special process is not executed in the lottery, the specific The predetermined information is not excluded from the target of the assignment determination. According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the benefit awarded to the player from becoming excessive, and to expect that the result of the grant correspondence will be obtained when the specific predetermined information becomes the target of the grant determination. It becomes possible.

Feature A9. And a launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) for launching game balls toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player.
In the game area, at least a first start ball part (upper operation opening 23) and a second start ball part (lower operation port 24) as start ball parts capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area. ) Is provided,
The predetermined information storage means is
First predetermined information storage means (first holding area Ra) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting ball storage part;
And a second predetermined information storage unit (second holding area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when the game ball enters the second starting ball storage unit.
The assignment determination unit performs the assignment determination on each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage unit or the second predetermined information storage unit.
When the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit, the predetermined information stored by the acquisition unit is stored in the first predetermined information at an earlier timing than the stored predetermined information. Prioritizing means (first, second and second means for making the provision determination by the provision determination means be performed on the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means, even if stored in the means In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S504 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1805 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60)
The specification means starts the specification when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and does not start until the predetermined start condition is satisfied even when the predetermined information is present when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. In the configuration, the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage unit and the second predetermined information storage unit are stored after the predetermined start condition is established until the predetermined end condition is established. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A8, wherein only one of the predetermined information being processed is targeted for the specific execution.

  According to the feature A9, the predetermined predetermined information stored in the first predetermined storage unit and the second predetermined storage unit are stored in the predetermined execution cycle in which the identification unit performs the identification when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Only one of the specified specific information being executed is subject to specific execution by the specifying means. By this, the number of specific predetermined information to be targeted for specifying whether or not the special information is dealt with is not too large, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an advantageous event for the player too much. Is possible. In addition, since the specific execution target by the specifying unit is switched in units of the type of the predetermined storage unit in the predetermined execution time, the processing configuration for determining the type of the predetermined information to be the specific execution target is simplified. It is possible to

Feature A10. And a launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) for launching game balls toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player.
In the game area, at least a first start ball part (upper operation opening 23) and a second start ball part (lower operation port 24) as start ball parts capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area. ) Is provided,
The predetermined information storage means is
First predetermined information storage means (first holding area Ra) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting ball storage part;
And a second predetermined information storage unit (second holding area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when the game ball enters the second starting ball storage unit.
The assignment determination unit performs the assignment determination on each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage unit or the second predetermined information storage unit.
When the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit, the predetermined information stored by the acquisition unit is stored in the first predetermined information at an earlier timing than the stored predetermined information. Prioritizing means (first, second, and so on) are configured to cause the assignment determination by the assignment determining unit to be performed on the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage unit even if stored in the unit. In the fourth to seventh embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S504 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1805 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60)
The first predetermined information storage unit stores the benefit provided when the predetermined information to be subjected to the addition determination stored in the second predetermined information storage unit results in the application correspondence result. The predetermined information to be subjected to the assignment determination is more preferential than the privilege to be granted when the assignment result is obtained,
When the specification by the specification unit is performed in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit, the exclusion unit is configured to store at least one of the predetermined information in the second predetermined information storage unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A9, wherein the gaming machine is left without being excluded from the target of the assignment determination.

  According to the feature A10, even if the identification or special processing is executed by the identification unit in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit, one or more predetermined items are thereafter stored in the second predetermined information storage unit The state in which the information is stored is maintained. This makes it possible to secure a situation in which the assignment determination is performed on the second predetermined information to which an advantageous benefit is likely to be applied when the result of the assignment response is a target of priority digestion.

  Characteristics A11. The special execution means, when the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information, makes the execution contents of the special processing different according to the contents of the specific predetermined information. Features A1 to A10 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A11, it is possible to make the execution content of the special process different according to the content of the specific predetermined information. This makes it possible to diversify the execution content of the special processing based on the content of the specific predetermined information.

  Note that one or more configurations among features A1 to A11, features B1 to B4, features C1 to C17, and features D1 to D3 may be applied to the features A1 to A11. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (pending information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition trigger (winning to the upper actuation opening 23 or lower actuation opening 24) Execution of winning processing for the operation opening in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 Function),
Predetermined information storage means (a first holding area Ra and a second holding area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A determination is made as to whether the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the addition correspondence information (information to be a big hit result) corresponding to the provision of profit, and a plurality of the predetermined information storage means are stored. An assignment determination unit (a function of executing variation start processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that sequentially performs the assignment determination on the plurality of pieces of predetermined information when the predetermined information is stored;
Privilege giving means (main control device 60) for giving a privilege to the player based on the result of the assignment judgment that the predetermined information to be judged corresponds to the assignment correspondence information. Function to execute the game state transition process in the MPU 62 of
Game times control means for controlling the game times execution means so that the game turn operations are executed corresponding to the execution of the assignment determination (function to execute the game times control process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) When,
The timing at which it becomes possible to execute the above-mentioned grant judgment corresponding to the above-mentioned game run operation for the next run time from the execution timing of the above-mentioned grant judgment corresponding to the above-mentioned play cycle operation for a predetermined run time Specifying means for performing at least one specific determination among the plurality of pieces of the predetermined information, at least the identification determination and the determination as to whether or not the information corresponds to the addition correspondence information in at least a predetermined situation A function of executing the process of step S1807 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60),
Special execution means (in the first and fourth embodiments, steps in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for executing special processing for causing an event advantageous to the player based on the result of the specific determination by the specific means A function to execute the processing of S1305 to step S1314, a function to execute the processing of step S1613 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the second embodiment, and a step S2304 to a step in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the third embodiment Function to execute the processing of S2308),
Exclusion means for excluding at least a part of the predetermined information subjected to the specific determination from the target of the additional determination (in the first and fourth embodiments, the process of step S911 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is executed Function in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1614 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, a specific determination may be executed collectively on a plurality of predetermined information, and a special process for causing an event advantageous to the player is performed based on the result of the specific determination. . This makes it possible to create a situation different from the situation in which the award determination is performed on one predetermined information with regard to the decision as to whether or not to award the player a benefit, and the situation in which the player pay attention It is possible to diversify. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, at least part of the predetermined information subjected to the specific determination may be excluded from the target of the assignment determination. As a result, it becomes possible to further limit the occurrence of an event for which the predetermined information subjected to the specific determination is to be subjected to the additional determination, so that the profit provided to the player is not excessive. It is possible to

  Feature B2. When a plurality of pieces of the predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage unit, the predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination within the range of the number of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage unit A game machine according to feature B1, comprising predetermined information number changing means (a function of executing the processing of step S1902 and step S1908 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for changing the number.

  According to the feature B2, when a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage unit, the predetermined information to be subjected to the identification determination within the range of the number of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage unit It is possible to change the number. In this case, as the number of predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage unit increases, the number of predetermined information that can be selected as the number of predetermined information to be subjected to the identification determination increases. Here, it is assumed that the player wants to increase the number of types of predetermined information that can be selected as the number of predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination. Therefore, according to the configuration, it is possible to expect that a predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means, and to increase the degree of attention to the number of pieces of predetermined information targeted for execution of the specific determination Become.

  Feature B3. A feature B1 or B characterized by comprising determination means (a function of executing the process of step S1810 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) which causes the player to determine the number of pieces of predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination. The gaming machine described in B2.

  According to the feature B3, the player can determine the number of pieces of predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of determining the number of predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination. Furthermore, according to the present feature B3, in the case where the predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination determined by the player includes the predetermined information corresponding to the provision correspondence information, the player is given a sense of superiority. It is possible to

Feature B4. And a launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) for launching game balls toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player.
In the game area, at least a first start ball part (upper operation opening 23) and a second start ball part (lower operation port 24) as start ball parts capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area. ) Is provided,
The predetermined information storage means is
First predetermined information storage means (first holding area Ra) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting ball storage part;
And a second predetermined information storage unit (second holding area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when the game ball enters the second starting ball storage unit.
The assignment determination unit performs the assignment determination on each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage unit or the second predetermined information storage unit.
When the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit, the predetermined information stored by the acquisition unit is stored in the first predetermined information at an earlier timing than the stored predetermined information. Priority means (first, second and second means for making the identification determination by the identification means be performed on the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means, even if stored in the means In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S504 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the function of executing the processing of step S1805 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the third embodiment)
In a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit, even if a plurality of the predetermined information are stored in the first predetermined information storage unit, they are stored in the first predetermined information storage unit The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3, wherein a plurality of pieces of the predetermined information is limited to be an execution target of the specific determination.

  According to the feature B4, since the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is a target of priority digestion and the benefit given when the additional judgment result is obtained, the first predetermined information is more advantageous. The player expects the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means to be the target of the addition determination, rather than the predetermined information stored in the storage means being the target of the addition determination. In this case, in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit, even if the plurality of predetermined information is stored in the first predetermined information storage unit, the plurality of predetermined information is an execution target of the identification determination Being limited. As a result, even in such a situation, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the assignment determination or the identification determination on the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means.

  Note that one or more configurations among features A1 to A11, features B1 to B4, features C1 to C17, and features D1 to D3 may be applied to the features B1 to B4. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (pending information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition trigger (winning to the upper actuation opening 23 or lower actuation opening 24) Execution of winning processing for the operation opening in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 Function),
Predetermined information storage means (a first holding area Ra and a second holding area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
It is determined whether or not the predetermined information corresponds to the transition correspondence information (information to be a big hit result), and if a plurality of the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the plurality of the predetermined information are stored. Transition determination means (a function of executing variation start processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that sequentially performs the transition determination on predetermined information;
When the predetermined information subjected to the transition determination corresponds to the transition correspondence information, the advantageous transition means (of the main control device 60) shifts the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (round game) advantageous to the player. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 62),
A destination specifying means (specifically, the first specifying means for specifying whether or not the specific predetermined information corresponds to the transition correspondence information before the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means becomes the target of the transition determination In the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1003 and step S1005 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and in the second embodiment, executing the processing of step S1703 and step S1705 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 Function, in the fifth and sixth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S2805 and step S3403 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and in the seventh embodiment, the process of step S2805 and step S4203 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 And the ability to perform
When it is specified by the destination specifying means that the specific predetermined information stored in the advantageous game state in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information, the advantageous game state is ended. Special effect executing means (in the fifth and sixth embodiments, step S2613 and step S2614 in the main control unit 60 of the main control device 60) for executing the special effect for enabling the player to have such recognition A function of executing the processing of step S4014 and the function of executing the processing of step S4015 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the seventh embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, when it is specified by the destination specifying means that the specific predetermined information stored in the advantageous game state in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information, the advantageous game state is ended. A special effect is executed that allows the player to have such recognition as not being. In this case, when the advantageous gaming state is continuously executed without much time, it is possible for the player to recognize the plurality of advantageous gaming states as one advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the advantageous gaming state having a longer execution period than the normal advantageous gaming state can be generated without extending the execution period of the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to the feature C1, wherein the special effect execution means continues the special effect at least until a new advantageous game state is started.

  According to the feature C2, by continuing the special effect at least until a new advantageous gaming state is started, one advantageous gaming state and the next advantageous gaming state which are continuously executed without much time This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the period between is an intermediate period of one advantageous gaming state.

Feature C3. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) switchably provided between the open state and the closed state;
Variable ball entering control means (function to execute the closing execution process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that executes variable ball entering control that becomes the closed state after the variable ball entering means becomes the open state;
Equipped with
In the advantageous gaming state, the variable entering control is executed a plurality of times with a waiting period interposed,
The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the special effect execution unit is configured to execute an effect that enables the player to recognize that the waiting period is performed as the special effect.

  According to the feature C3, by performing an effect that allows the player to recognize that it is a standby period as a special effect, one advantageous gaming state and the following advantageous effect are continuously executed without much space. It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the period between the game states is the standby period in one advantageous game state.

Feature C4. Game times control means for controlling the game times execution means so that the game turn operations are executed corresponding to the execution of the transition determination (function to execute the game times control means in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) When,
Period determination means (a function for executing a variable display time related process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for determining the duration of the game circulation operation;
Equipped with
The period deciding means is a short period deciding means for deciding a relatively short period as the continuation period from the end of the advantageous gaming state until the release condition is established (in the fifth and seventh embodiments, the main control device 60 is characterized by including processing for executing the processing of step S3601 to step S3603 in the MPU 62, and in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S3901 to step S3902 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

  According to the feature C4, when the advantageous game state is executed continuously without much time, the time required from the end of one advantageous game state to the start of the next advantageous game state is shortened. It is possible to And, by performing special effects between these advantageous game states, it is possible to make the player recognize multiple advantageous game states as one advantageous game state.

  Feature C5. The short-term determination means determines a relatively short period as the continuation period from the end of the advantageous gaming state to the establishment of the cancellation condition regardless of the identification result of the destination identification means. The gaming machine according to the feature C4.

  According to the feature C5, when the advantageous gaming state is ended, the duration of the game conversion operation is uniquely set to a relatively short period. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting the state in which the duration of the game operation is relatively short.

  Feature C6. The gaming machine according to the feature C5, wherein the cancellation condition is that the game circulation operation is executed a predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state is ended.

  According to the feature C6, when the gaming cycle operation is executed a predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state is ended, the state in which the duration of the gaming cycle operation is relatively short is released. Thus, in a configuration in which the duration of the gaming cycle operation is set to a relatively short period when the advantageous gaming state ends regardless of the specification result of the destination specifying means, the ending trigger of the state is It becomes possible to be clear.

Feature C7. And a launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) for launching game balls toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player.
In the game area, at least a first start ball part (upper operation opening 23) and a second start ball part (lower operation port 24) as start ball parts capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area. And are provided,
The predetermined information storage means is
First predetermined information storage means (first holding area Ra) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting ball storage part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit When,
Second predetermined information storage means (second reserve area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting ball storage part with the second prescribed number as the upper limit When,
Equipped with
The migration determination means performs the migration determination on each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage means or the second predetermined information storage means.
If the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is the target of the transition determination, the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage means is the target of the transition determination It is more advantageous than
In the gaming machine, when the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit, the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit is earlier than the stored predetermined information. Prioritizing means (first, second, and so on) are configured to make the shift determination be performed on the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means, even if stored in the first predetermined information storage means. In the fourth to seventh embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S504 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1805 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60)
The feature described in the feature C5 or C6 is that the cancellation condition is a number of times corresponding to the number corresponding to the number smaller than the second predetermined number after the advantageous game state is ended. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature C7, when the advantageous gaming state is ended regardless of the specification result of the destination specifying means, the second rule is provided in the configuration in which the duration of the game cycle operation is relatively short. When the number of times of game operation corresponding to the number smaller than the number is performed, the relatively short period is released. Thereby, when the advantageous gaming state occurs in a state where the second predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage means, a period for which the game operation corresponding to all the predetermined information is relatively short It is possible to prevent it from ending at. Then, the operation for playing the game triggered by the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is executed in a relatively long period, during which time the predetermined information is newly stored in the second predetermined information storage means It becomes possible to make it memorize. Since the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is more advantageous than the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage means and is preferentially subjected to the transition determination, as described above By reducing the possibility of the situation where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, the duration of the game cycle operation is relative when the advantageous gaming state is ended regardless of the specification result of the destination specifying means. Even if it is configured to be set to a state in which the time period is extremely short, it is difficult for the player to be disadvantaged.

Feature C8. Switching control means for switching and controlling the second starting ball entry portion between an open state and a closed state (function to execute a process for supporting electric support in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
As a control mode of the switching control means, a first mode (high frequency support mode) in which the second starting ball entry part is likely to be in the open state, and the second starting entry ball part is more open than the first mode. There is a second mode (low frequency support mode) in which it is difficult to be in the state or the second starting ball entry part is not in the open state,
In the feature C7, the short-term determination means determines a relatively short duration as the duration until the cancellation condition is satisfied after the advantageous gaming state is ended in at least the second mode. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C8, since it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry part in the second mode, game play triggered by the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means By performing the operation for a relatively long period, it is possible to newly store predetermined information in the second predetermined information storage means during that time.

  Feature C9. The short-term determination means specifies that the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information when the advantageous gaming state ends. In the case of any one of features C4 to C8, a relatively short period is determined as the continuation period from the end of the advantageous gaming state to the establishment of the release condition.

  According to the feature C9, only when the predetermined information corresponding to the transition correspondence information is stored at the time when the advantageous gaming state is ended, the continuation period of the game operation is set to a relatively short period. Ru. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the duration of the gaming cycle operation from being set to a relatively short period even when the advantageous gaming state is not continuously executed. .

  Feature C10. The gaming machine according to the feature C9, wherein the cancellation condition is that the advantageous gaming state is newly generated.

  According to the feature C10, it is possible to reliably shorten the period until the advantageous gaming state newly occurs.

Feature C11. And a launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) for launching game balls toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player.
In the game area, at least a first start ball part (upper operation opening 23) and a second start ball part (lower operation port 24) as start ball parts capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area. And are provided,
The predetermined information storage means is
First predetermined information storage means (first holding area Ra) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting ball storage part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit When,
Second predetermined information storage means (second reserve area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting ball storage part with the second prescribed number as the upper limit When,
Equipped with
The migration determination means performs the migration determination on each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage means or the second predetermined information storage means.
In the gaming machine, when the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit, the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit is earlier than the stored predetermined information. Prioritizing means (first, second, and so on) are configured to make the shift determination be performed on the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means, even if stored in the first predetermined information storage means. In the fourth to seventh embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S504 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1805 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60)
The special effect execution means is that the specific predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information when the advantageous gaming state is finished. If specified, the special effect is executed, and even when the predetermined information corresponding to the transition correspondence information is stored in the first predetermined information storage means when the advantageous gaming state is ended, the special information is stored. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the effect is not executed.

  According to the feature C11, when the predetermined information of the second predetermined information storage unit prioritized at the time of the transition determination corresponds to the transition correspondence information, the special effect may be executed, but not prioritized at the time of the transition determination Even if the predetermined information of the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information, the special effect is not executed. When the special effect is executed triggered by the predetermined information of the first predetermined information storage unit not prioritized at the time of the transition judgment, the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit before the predetermined information becomes the target of the transition judgment. Then, the predetermined information of the second predetermined information storage means is preferentially subjected to the transition determination, and as a result, there is a concern that the special effect will be continued. On the other hand, such a disadvantage can be prevented from occurring because the special effect is not executed triggered by the predetermined information of the first predetermined information storage means which is not prioritized in the transition determination.

Feature C12. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) switchably provided between the open state and the closed state;
Variable ball entering control means (function to execute the closing execution process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that executes variable ball entering control that becomes the closed state after the variable ball entering means becomes the open state;
Equipped with
In the advantageous gaming state, the variable entering control is executed a plurality of times with a waiting period interposed,
The special effect execution means is configured to execute, as the special effect, an effect that enables the player to recognize that the waiting period is in progress.
The short-term determination means specifies that the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information when the advantageous gaming state ends. In the case of the first variable entry control in the advantageous gaming state triggered by the specific predetermined information after the last execution cycle of the variable entry control in the advantageous gaming state to be the end of the The advantageous gaming state triggered by the specific predetermined information after the advantageous gaming state to be ended is ended so that the period until the execution time starts is the same as or substantially the same as the standby period The game machine according to any one of the features C9 to C11, wherein a continuation period of the operation for playing a game until the condition is determined to be a relatively short period.

  According to the feature C12, when the advantageous gaming state is continuously executed without much time, in the next advantageous gaming state after the variable entering control of the last execution number in one advantageous gaming state is ended. The period until the first entry of variable ball entry control is started is the same as or substantially the same as a waiting period which is a period between multiple variable ball entry controls in one advantageous gaming state. In this way, it is easy for the player to recognize that the period between one advantageous gaming state and the next advantageous gaming state which are continuously executed without much space is a period in the middle of one advantageous gaming state. Become.

Feature C13. Opening setting means for generating an opening period before the first variable entry control is started in the advantageous gaming state (processing to set numerical information corresponding to the opening period to the timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) When,
Ending setting means (a process of setting numerical information corresponding to the ending period to the timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for generating an ending period after the last variable ball entry control is finished in the advantageous gaming state;
When it is specified by the destination specifying means that the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information when the advantageous gaming state is ended, Means for preventing at least one of the ending period of the advantageous gaming state and the opening period of the advantageous gaming state triggered by the specific predetermined information from becoming a relatively short period of time (A function of executing the processing of step S4020 and step S4208 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60),
The gaming machine according to feature C12, comprising:

  According to the feature C13, not only the duration of the game conversion operation but also at least one of the ending period of one advantageous gaming state and the opening period of the next advantageous gaming state is adjusted. Thus, the period from the end of the variable entry control of the last run number in one advantageous game state to the start of the variable entry control of the first run number in the next advantageous game state is one advantageous It becomes easy to set so as to become the same as or substantially the same as a standby period which is a period between a plurality of variable ball entry controls in the gaming state.

Feature C14. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) switchably provided between the open state and the closed state;
Variable ball entering control means (function to execute the closing execution process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that executes variable ball entering control that becomes the closed state after the variable ball entering means becomes the open state;
Equipped with
In the advantageous gaming state, the variable entering control is executed a plurality of times with a waiting period interposed,
The special effect execution means is configured to execute, as the special effect, an effect that enables the player to recognize that the waiting period is in progress.
This game machine is
Opening setting means for generating an opening period before the first variable entry control is started in the advantageous gaming state (processing to set numerical information corresponding to the opening period to the timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) When,
Ending setting means (a process of setting numerical information corresponding to the ending period to the timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for generating an ending period after the last variable ball entry control is finished in the advantageous gaming state;
When it is specified by the destination specifying means that the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information when the advantageous gaming state is ended, Means for preventing at least one of the ending period of the advantageous gaming state and the opening period of the advantageous gaming state triggered by the specific predetermined information from becoming a relatively short period of time (A function of executing the processing of step S4020 and step S4208 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60),
A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C13, comprising:

  According to the feature C14, when the advantageous gaming state is executed continuously without much time, the time required from the end of one advantageous gaming state to the start of the next advantageous gaming state is shortened. It is possible to And, by performing special effects between these advantageous game states, it is possible to make the player recognize multiple advantageous game states as one advantageous game state.

Feature C15. The destination specifying unit is a first destination specifying that specifies whether specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage unit corresponds to the transition correspondence information by a predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state. Means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2801 to S2805 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
In the gaming machine, when it is specified by the first destination specifying means that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the transition correspondence information, the current advantageous gaming state is obtained at the predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state. The first notification means (a function of executing the processing of step S3301 to step S3304 in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) is provided to perform predetermined notification that enables the player to recognize that the execution period is extended,
The destination specifying means specifies whether the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information at a timing after the predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state. (The function of executing the process of step S3403 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the fifth and sixth embodiments, the process of step S4203 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the seventh embodiment) Function to execute)
The special effect execution means is that the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information when the advantageous gaming state is ended or the first destination identification means or The game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C14, wherein the special effect is performed when specified by the second destination specifying means.

  According to the feature C15, according to the first destination-specific result executed by the predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state, the player can be selected when the execution period of the current advantageous gaming state is extended at the predetermined timing of the advantageous gaming state A predetermined notification is made to allow the user to recognize. As a result, the player is expected to perform the predetermined notification at the predetermined timing of the advantageous gaming state. In addition, second prior specification is performed at a timing later than the predetermined timing. And, when it is specified in either the first destination specification or the second destination specification that the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information, the special effect is thereafter given Is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the frequency at which the special effect is performed while enabling the execution of the predetermined notification at the predetermined timing.

  Feature C16. The gaming machine according to the feature C15, wherein the second destination specifying means can target predetermined information which is the same as the predetermined information specified by the first destination specifying means.

  According to the feature C16, the first prior specification and the second prior specification can be performed on the same predetermined information. Thereby, it is possible to accurately specify whether predetermined information corresponding to the transition correspondence information is stored at the end of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature C17. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) switchably provided between the open state and the closed state;
Variable ball entering control means (function to execute the closing execution process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that executes variable ball entering control that becomes the closed state after the variable ball entering means becomes the open state;
Equipped with
In the advantageous gaming state, the variable entering control is executed a plurality of times with a waiting period interposed,
This gaming machine sets ending information on the ending setting means (a timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main control 60 sets numerical information corresponding to the ending period) which causes the ending period after the last variable ball entry control in the advantageous game state is finished. Processing) to
The predetermined timing is a timing prior to the timing at which the variable entry control of the last execution number is finished in the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature C15 or C16, wherein the timing at which the specification by the second destination specifying unit is performed is a timing after the timing at which the ending period is started.

  According to the feature C17, the predetermined information can be executed at the timing before the ending period is started in the advantageous gaming state, while being stored in the predetermined information storage means until the ending period is started in the advantageous gaming state It becomes possible to handle the predetermined information as information for specifying whether or not the special presentation is to be triggered.

  Note that one or more configurations among features A1 to A11, features B1 to B4, features C1 to C17, and features D1 to D3 may be applied to the features C1 to C17. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group A, the feature group B, and the feature group C, the following problems can be solved.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a hitting gaming state or the like is triggered by the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion provided in the gaming area. To be done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery being performed, and the stop result according to the lottery result is obtained when the final stop display of the variable display is performed. The display effect of one game cycle to be displayed is executed. In addition, when the lottery result is winning transition to the so-called winning gaming state, for example after the display effect for one game cycle is performed, opening and closing of the variable winning device provided in the game area is executed, variable The game balls are paid out according to the number of ball entry into the winning device.

  In addition, there is a pachinko gaming machine in which information used for lottery is held and stored when the game ball enters the starting ball entry portion while the variation display of the pattern is being performed. In the case of the pending storage, after the variation display of the pattern is finished, the winning lottery is performed using the information stored on the pending, and the variation display of the next pattern is started.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (pending information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition trigger (winning to the upper actuation opening 23 or lower actuation opening 24) Execution of winning processing for the operation opening in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 Function),
Predetermined information storage means (a first holding area Ra and a second holding area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
It is determined whether or not the predetermined information corresponds to the transition correspondence information (information to be a big hit result), and if a plurality of the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the plurality of the predetermined information are stored. Transition determination means (a function of executing variation start processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that sequentially performs the transition determination on predetermined information;
When the predetermined information subjected to the transition determination corresponds to the transition correspondence information, the advantageous transition means (the gaming state in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) shifts the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player Function to execute the migration process),
Before the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means becomes the target of the migration determination, a specification result for specifying whether the specific predetermined information corresponds to the migration correspondence information Destination specifying means for executing destination identification processing to be confirmed (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1003 and step S1005 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60; in the second embodiment, the main control device 60 Function of executing the processing of step S1703 and step S1705 in the MPU 62, the function of executing processing of step S2805 and step S3403 in the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 in the fifth and sixth embodiments, main in the seventh embodiment Execute processing of step S2805 and step S4203 in the MPU 62 of the control device 60 And that function),
Notification control means (in the fifth and sixth embodiments, step S2806 to step S2809 and step S3406 to step S3406 to step S2806 in the main controller 60 in the fifth and sixth embodiments) for executing the destination identification correspondence notification corresponding to the result of the destination identification process A function of executing the process of S3408, and in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S2806 to S2809, S4209, and S4211 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60);
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the destination specifying means can execute the destination specifying process a plurality of times for the same predetermined information.

  According to the feature D1, by performing the destination identification correspondence notification corresponding to the result of the destination identification process, the player can grasp information corresponding to the result of the transition determination in advance. In this case, the prespecified process may be performed multiple times for the same predetermined information. This makes it possible to accurately specify whether or not the predetermined information corresponding to the transfer correspondence information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

Feature D2. The destination identification means is
First destination specifying means (main control device 60 for specifying whether or not specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information by the predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state Function in step S2801 to step S2805 in the MPU 62 of
Second destination specifying means for specifying whether or not specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information at a timing after the predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state (In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S3403 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60; in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4203 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60);
Equipped with
The notification control means
Means for causing the first notification to be executed as the destination identification correspondence notification when the first destination identification means identifies that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the transition correspondence information (the main control device 60) a function of executing the processing of steps S2806 to S2809 in the MPU 62 of 60);
When it is specified by the first destination specifying means or the second destination specifying means that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the transition correspondence information, a second notification is executed as the destination specifying correspondence notification (In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S3406 to step S3408 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60; in the seventh embodiment, step S4209 and step S4211 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) Function to execute the processing of
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to the feature D1, wherein the second destination specifying means can target predetermined information which is the same as the predetermined information specified by the first destination specifying means.

  According to the feature D2, the first notification is performed at the predetermined timing of the advantageous gaming state in accordance with the first destination specifying result executed by the predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state. As a result, the player is expected to perform the first notification at the predetermined timing of the advantageous gaming state. In addition, second prior specification is performed at a timing later than the predetermined timing. Then, when it is specified in any of the first destination specification and the second destination specification that the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means corresponds to the migration correspondence information, the second specific information is thereafter specified. Notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the second notification is performed while enabling the execution of the first notification at a predetermined timing. In addition, first prior specification and second prior specification may be performed on the same predetermined information. Thereby, it is possible to accurately specify whether predetermined information corresponding to the transition correspondence information is stored at the end of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature D3. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) switchably provided between the open state and the closed state;
Variable ball entering control means (function to execute the closing execution process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that executes variable ball entering control that becomes the closed state after the variable ball entering means becomes the open state;
Equipped with
In the advantageous gaming state, the variable entering control is executed a plurality of times with a waiting period interposed,
This gaming machine sets ending information on the ending setting means (a timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main control 60 sets numerical information corresponding to the ending period) which causes the ending period after the last variable ball entry control in the advantageous game state is finished. Processing) to
The predetermined timing is a timing prior to the timing at which the variable entry control of the last execution number is finished in the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to the feature D2, wherein the timing at which the specification by the second destination specifying unit is performed is a timing after the timing at which the ending period is started.

  According to the feature D3, while the first notification can be executed at the timing before the ending period is started in the advantageous gaming state, the predetermined information storage means is performed until the ending period is started in the advantageous gaming state It becomes possible to handle the stored predetermined information as information for specifying whether or not the second notification is to be executed.

  Note that one or more configurations among features A1 to A11, features B1 to B4, features C1 to C17, and features D1 to D3 may be applied to the features D1 to D3. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature D group, the following problems can be solved.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a hitting gaming state or the like is triggered by the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion provided in the gaming area. To be done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery being performed, and the stop result according to the lottery result is obtained when the final stop display of the variable display is performed. The display effect of one game cycle to be displayed is executed. In addition, when the lottery result is winning transition to the so-called winning gaming state, for example after the display effect for one game cycle is performed, opening and closing of the variable winning device provided in the game area is executed, variable The game balls are paid out according to the number of ball entry into the winning device.

  In addition, there is a pachinko gaming machine in which information used for lottery is held and stored when the game ball enters the starting ball entry portion while the variation display of the pattern is being performed. In the case of the pending storage, after the variation display of the pattern is finished, the winning lottery is performed using the information stored on the pending, and the variation display of the next pattern is started.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to accurately specify the information stored on hold, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features is described below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  22: variable winning device, 23: upper operating port, 24: lower operating port, 60: main control device, 62: MPU, 81: gaming ball launch mechanism, 100: display control device, 102: MPU, Ra: first holding Area, Rb: second holding area, T: timer counter.

Claims (1)

Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information based on the occurrence of the acquisition opportunity;
Predetermined information storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A determination is made as to whether the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the assignment correspondence information corresponding to the provision of profit, and a plurality of the predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means In the case where the predetermined determination information is determined, the determination unit sequentially performs the determination on the plurality of pieces of predetermined information;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege based on the result of the assignment determination becoming the assignment correspondence result in which the predetermined information to be determined corresponds to the assignment correspondence information;
Specifying means for specifying whether or not the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information before the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means becomes a target of the addition determination;
Special execution means for executing special processing for causing an event advantageous to the player based on the fact that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information by the specific means;
An exclusion unit that excludes the specific predetermined information from the target of the assignment determination;
Equipped with
The special execution means is provided with a lottery means for specifying whether or not to execute the special process by a lottery when the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the special processing is executed in the lottery becomes higher or higher as the number of the specific predetermined information corresponding to the special information increases .

Images